Omron Network Card CPM1A User Manual

Cat.No. W317–E1–5  
SYSMAC  
CPM1A  
Programmable Controllers  
OPERATION MANUAL  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CPM1A Programmable Controllers  
Operation Manual  
Revised February 2000  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice:  
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator  
and only for the purposes described in this manual.  
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed  
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam-  
age to property.  
DANGER  
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or  
serious injury.  
!
!
!
WARNING  
Caution  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or  
serious injury.  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or  
moderate injury, or property damage.  
OMRON Product References  
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word Unitis also capitalized when it refers  
to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.  
The abbreviation Ch,which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means  
wordand is abbreviated Wdin documentation in this sense.  
The abbreviation PCmeans Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for any-  
thing else.  
Visual Aids  
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of  
information.  
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation  
of the product.  
1, 2, 3... 1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.  
OMRON, 1997  
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any  
form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permis-  
sion of OMRON.  
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is  
constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change  
without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no  
responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the informa-  
tion contained in this publication.  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
xi  
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6 EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
xii  
xii  
xii  
xiii  
xiii  
xvii  
SECTION 1  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1
2
10  
17  
1-1 CPM1A Features and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-3 Revised Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
SECTION 2  
Unit Specifications and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-2 Unit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
19  
20  
28  
SECTION 3  
Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
35  
3-1 Design Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-2 Selecting an Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-3 Installing the CPM1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-4 Wiring and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
36  
37  
39  
43  
SECTION 4  
Using Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
67  
4-1 Support Software Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-2 Using a Programming Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3 Programming Console Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-4 Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
68  
74  
80  
101  
SECTION 5  
Test Runs and Error Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
5-1 Initial System Checks and Test Run Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-2 The CPM1A Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3 Self-diagnosis Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-4 Programming Console Operation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-5 Programming Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-6 Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-7 Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-8 Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
110  
112  
113  
115  
115  
117  
125  
126  
SECTION 6  
Expansion Memory Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
6-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-2 Specifications and Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-3 Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
128  
129  
130  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Appendices  
A Standard Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
B Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
137  
141  
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163  
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About this Manual:  
The CPM1A is a compact, high-speed Programmable Controller (PC) designed for control operations in  
systems requiring from 10 to 100 I/O points per PC. There are two manuals describing the setup and  
operation of the CPM1A: the CPM1A Operation Manual (this manual) and the CPM1/CPM1A/CPM2A/  
CPM2C/SRM1(-V2) Programming Manual (W353).  
This manual describes the system configuration and installation of the CPM1A and provides a basic  
explanation of operating procedures for the Programming Consoles. It also introduces the capabilities of  
the SYSMAC Support Software (SSS). Read this manual first to acquaint yourself with the CPM1A.  
The CPM1/CPM1A/CPM2A/CPM2C/SRM1(-V2) Programming Manual (W353) provides detailed  
descriptions of the CPM1As programming functions. The SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manu-  
als: Basics and C-series PCs (W247 and W248) provide descriptions of SSS operations for the CPM1A  
and other SYSMAC C-series PCs. The SYSMAC-CPT Support Software Quick Start Guide (W332) and  
User Manual (W333) provide descriptions of ladder diagram operations in the Windows environment. The  
WS02-CXPC1-ECX-Programmer User Manual (W361) and the CX-Server User Manual (W362) provide  
details of operations for the WS02-CXPC1-E CX-Programmer.  
Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provide before attempting  
to install and operate the CPM1A.  
Section 1 gives a brief overview of the steps involved in developing of a CPM1A System, describes the  
possible system configurations, and describes the CPM1As special features and functions.  
Section 2 provides the technical specifications of the Units that go together to create a CPM1A PC and  
describes the main components of the Units.  
Section 3 describes how to install and wire a CPM1A PC.  
Section 4 describes SSS capabilities, how to connect the Programming Console, and how to perform the  
various Programming Console operations.  
Section 5 describes how to perform a test run and how to diagnose and correct the hardware and soft-  
ware errors that can occur during PC operation.  
Section 6 describes how to use the CPM1-EMU01-V1 Expansion Memory Unit. Follow the handling pre-  
cautions and procedures to properly use the Unit.  
Appendix A provides tables of CPM1A Units and related products.  
Appendix B provides the dimensions of CPM1A Units.  
!
WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in  
personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each  
section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section  
and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRECAUTIONS  
This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Controller (PC) and related devices.  
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Programmable Con-  
troller. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a  
PC system.  
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6 EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
xii  
xii  
xii  
xiii  
xiii  
xvii  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Application Precautions  
5
1
Intended Audience  
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowl-  
edge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).  
Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.  
Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.  
Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.  
2
General Precautions  
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications  
described in the operation manuals.  
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual  
or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation  
systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement ma-  
chines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that  
may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult  
your OMRON representative.  
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are  
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the  
systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.  
This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be  
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this manual  
close at hand for reference during operation.  
WARNING It is extremely important that a PC and all PC Units be used for the specified  
purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that can  
directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON  
representative before applying a PC System to the above-mentioned  
applications.  
!
3
Safety Precautions  
WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing so  
!
!
!
!
may result in electric shock.  
WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being  
supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.  
WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do so  
may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.  
WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable  
Controller), including the following items, in order to ensure safety in the system  
if an abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PC or another external factor  
affecting the PC operation. Not doing so may result in serious accidents.  
Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety  
measures must be provided in external control circuits.  
The PC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects any  
error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed. As a coun-  
termeasure for such errors, external safety measures must be provided to en-  
sure safety in the system.  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Application Precautions  
5
The PC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of the  
output relays or destruction of the output transistors. As a countermeasure for  
such problems, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in  
the system.  
When the 24-VDC output (service power supply to the PC) is overloaded or  
short-circuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs being turned  
OFF. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety measures must  
be provided to ensure safety in the system.  
WARNING When transferring programs to other nodes, or when making changes to I/O  
memory, confirm the safety of the destination node before transfer. Not doing so  
may result in injury.  
!
Caution Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be caused  
!
!
by extending the cycle time. Otherwise, the input signals may not be readable.  
Caution Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to the  
torque specified in the operation manual. The loose screws may result in burning  
or malfunction.  
4
Operating Environment Precautions  
Caution Do not operate the control system in the following places:  
!
Locations subject to direct sunlight.  
Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in  
the specifications.  
Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tempera-  
ture.  
Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.  
Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.  
Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.  
Locations subject to shock or vibration.  
Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the  
!
!
following locations:  
Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.  
Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.  
Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.  
Locations close to power supplies.  
Caution The operating environment of the PC System can have a large effect on the lon-  
gevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can lead to  
malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PC System. Be  
sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installa-  
tion and remains within the specified conditions during the life of the system.  
5
Application Precautions  
Observe the following precautions when using the PC System.  
WARNING Always heed these precautions. Failure to abide by the following precautions  
!
could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury.  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Application Precautions  
5
Always connect to a class-3 ground (to 100 or less) when installing the Units.  
Not connecting to a class-3 ground may result in electric shock.  
Always turn off the power supply to the PC before attempting any of the follow-  
ing. Not turning off the power supply may result in malfunction or electric  
shock.  
Mounting or dismounting I/O Units, CPU Units, or any other Units.  
Assembling the Units.  
Connecting or wiring the cables.  
Connecting or disconnecting the connectors.  
Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of the  
PC or the system, or could damage the PC or PC Units. Always heed these pre-  
cautions.  
!
Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the  
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines,  
momentary power interruptions, or other causes.  
Construct a control circuit so that power supply for the I/O circuits does not  
come ON before power supply for the Unit. If power supply for the I/O circuits  
comes ON before power supply for the Unit, normal operation may be tempo-  
rarily interrupted.  
If the operating mode is changed from RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM  
mode, with the IOM Hold Bit ON, the output will hold the most recent status. In  
such a case, ensure that the external load does not exceed specifications. (If  
operation is stopped because of an operation error (including FALS instruc-  
tions), the values in the internal memory of the CPU Unit will be saved, but the  
outputs will all turn OFF.)  
Always use the power supply voltage specified in the operation manuals. An  
incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning.  
Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the rated  
voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places where the  
power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result in malfunction.  
Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuit-  
ing in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures against short-circuiting may  
result in burning.  
Do not apply voltages to the Input Units in excess of the rated input voltage.  
Excess voltages may result in burning.  
Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the Output Units in excess of the  
maximum switching capacity. Excess voltage or loads may result in burning.  
Disconnect the functional ground terminal when performing withstand voltage  
tests. Not disconnecting the functional ground terminal may result in burning.  
Install the Unit properly as specified in the operation manual. Improper installa-  
tion of the Unit may result in malfunction.  
Be sure that all the mounting screws, terminal screws, and cable connector  
screws are tightened to the torque specified in the relevant manuals. Incorrect  
tightening torque may result in malfunction.  
Be sure to attach the supplied labels when wiring in order to prevent wiring cut-  
tings from entering in the Unit.  
Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipa-  
tion. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.  
Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to  
terminals. Connection of bare stranded wires may result in burning.  
Double-check all the wiring before turning on the power supply. Incorrect wir-  
ing may result in burning.  
xiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Application Precautions  
5
Be sure that the terminal blocks, expansion cables, and other items with lock-  
ing devices are properly locked into place. Improper locking may result in mal-  
function.  
Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on the  
Unit. Not checking the program may result in an unexpected operation.  
Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of  
the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.  
Changing the operating mode of the PC.  
Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.  
Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.  
Resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit the contents of  
the DM and HR Areas required for resuming operation. Not doing so may result  
in an unexpected operation.  
Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit. Doing  
either of these may break the cables.  
Do not place objects on top of the cables. Doing so may break the cables.  
When replacing parts, be sure to confirm that the rating of a new part is correct.  
Not doing so may result in malfunction or burning.  
Before touching the Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in  
order to discharge any static built-up. Not doing so may result in malfunction or  
damage.  
Do not touch the Expansion I/O Unit Connecting Cable while the power is  
being supplied in order to prevent any malfunction due to static electricity.  
When using a thermocouple-input type Temperature Sensor Unit, observe the  
following precautions:  
Do not remove the cold junction compensator attached at the time of deliv-  
ery. If the cold junction compensator is removed the Unit will not be able to  
measure temperatures correctly.  
Each of the input circuits is calibrated with the cold junction compensator  
attached to the Unit. If the Unit is used with the cold junction compensator  
from other Units, the Unit will not be able to measure temperatures cor-  
rectly.  
Do not touch the cold junction compensator. Doing so may result in incor-  
rect temperature measurement.  
Caution Always clear memory before beginning to program the CPM1A. Although  
memory is cleared before the CPU Unit is shipped (except for bits with specific  
functions), AR 1314, which turns ON when the internal capacitor cannot back up  
memory, may have turned ON during shipment.  
!
Caution If the CPM1A will be turned off for periods exceeding the data backup period of  
the internal capacitor, design the system so that it will not be influenced if data in  
the DM, HR, and CNT areas is cleared when power is turned off.  
!
!
Caution Either switch the CPM1A to RUN or MONITOR mode, or turn off and on power to  
the CPM1A after changing from a Programming Device any data that is backed  
up in flash memory. This data includes the user program, read-only DM area  
(DM 6144 to DM 6599), and the PC Setup (DM 6600 to DM 6655).  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Application Precautions  
5
The user program and memory area data in the CPM1A are backed up either  
by an internal capacitor or in flash memory as shown in the following table.  
Backup method  
Data  
Internal capacitor  
Read/write DM area (DM 0000 to DM 0999, DM 1022, and  
DM 1023)  
Error log area (DM 1000 to DM 1021)  
HR area (HR 00 to HR 19)  
Counter area (CNT 000 to CNT 127)  
User program  
Flash memory  
Read-only DM area (DM 6144 to DM 6599)  
PC Setup (DM 6600 to DM 6655)  
Note 1. The IR, TR, LR, and timer areas are not normally backed up when power is  
turned off and all contents will be cleared the next time power is turned on.  
(The PC Setup setting in DM 6601 can be used to back up this data. Refer to  
details on the PC Setup later in this manual for details.)  
2. The bits in the AR and SR areas have special functions and are set accord-  
ing to these functions when power is turned on.  
The capacitor backup time depends on the ambient temperature, as shown in  
the following graph. The backup time, however, assumes that the capacitor is  
fully charged, which requires that power be supplied to the CPU Unit continu-  
ously for at least 15 minutes.  
20  
10  
7
1
25  
40  
80  
Ambient temperature (_ C)  
If the power remains off for a period exceeding the data backup period,  
AR 1314 will turn ON to indicate that the capacitor can no longer back up data  
and the data backed up by the capacitor will be cleared. AR 1314 will remain  
ON unless it is turned OFF using I/O monitor operations, using memory clear  
operations, or from the user program.  
If desired, the PC Setup setting in DM 6604 can be set to create a fatal error  
and thus stop the system when AR 1314 goes ON.  
The data stored in flash memory will not be lost even if power remains off for a  
period exceeding the data backup period, because the data stored in flash  
memory will be read to the CPU Unit when the CPM1A is turned on.  
If the power is turned off without changing the mode from PROGRAM mode to  
RUN or MONITOR mode after having made changes in the data that is backed  
up in flash memory, the changes will not be written to flash memory. If the  
power is then left off for more than 20 days (at 25_ C), the changes (i.e., the  
contents of the RAM) will be erased and the data values will become unde-  
fined.  
xvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Application Precautions  
5
6
EC Directives  
6-1  
Applicable Directives  
EMC Directives  
Low Voltage Directive  
6-2  
Concepts  
EMC Directives  
OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related  
EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the  
overall machine. The actual products have been checked for conformity to EMC  
standards (see the following note). Whether the products conform to the stan-  
dards in the system used by the customer, however, must be checked by the  
customer.  
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Direc-  
tives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of the  
equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed. The cus-  
tomer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that devices and the  
overall machine conform to EMC standards.  
Note Applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are as follows:  
EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility): EN61131-2  
EMI (Electromagnetic Interference):  
EN50081-2  
(Radiated emission: 10-m regulations)  
Low Voltage Directive  
Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 VAC and 75 to  
1,500 VDC meet the required safety standards for the PC (EN61131-2).  
6-3  
Conformance to EC Directives  
The CPM1A PCs (transistor output models) comply with EC Directives. Relay  
output models do not conform to the EC Directives. To ensure that the machine  
or device in which the CPM1A PC is used complies with EC directives, the PC  
must be installed as follows:  
1, 2, 3...  
1. The CPM1A PC must be installed within a control panel.  
2. Reinforced insulation or double insulation must be used for the DC power  
supplies used for the communications and I/O power supplies.  
3. CPM1A PCs complying with EC Directives also conform to the Common  
Emission Standard (EN50081-2). Radiated emission characteristics (10-m  
regulations) may vary depending on the configuration of the control panel  
used, other devices connected to the control panel, wiring, and other condi-  
tions. You must therefore confirm that the overall machine or equipment  
complies with EC Directives.  
4. The CPM1A with relay output does not conform to the EC Directives. For  
devices for use in the EC, use the CPM1, which meets the CE marking  
requirements. Further information is available at any of the OMRON offices  
or OMRON sales representatives listed on the inside back cover of this  
manual.  
6-4  
CPM1A-MAD01 Conformance to EMC Directives  
Immunity testing conditions when using the current I/O of the CPM1A-MAD01  
are as follows.  
Total accuracy: +10%/-1%  
Insert the following core in each line as shown below.  
xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Application Precautions  
5
Recommended core: 2643-002402  
Manufacturer: Fair Rite Products Corp.  
xviii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECTION 1  
Introduction  
This section describes the CPM1A’s special features and functions and shows the possible system configurations. Refer to the  
Programming Manual (W353) for details on programming actual operation.  
1-1 CPM1A Features and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-1-1 CPM1A Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-1-2 I/O Terminal and IR Bit Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-1-3 CPM1A Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2-1 CPU Unit and Expansion I/O Unit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2-2 CPU Unit and Expansion Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2-3 Host Link Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2-4 One-to-one PC Link Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2-5 One-to-one NT Link Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2-6 CompoBus/S I/O Link Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-2-7 Peripheral Device Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
1-3 Revised Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2
2
4
5
10  
10  
10  
12  
14  
15  
15  
15  
17  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CPM1A Features and Functions  
Section 1-1  
1-1 CPM1A Features and Functions  
1-1-1 CPM1A Features  
One-piece Construction  
The CPM1A CPU Units feature a one-piece construction including 10, 20, 30, or  
40 built-in I/O terminals. The following three model groups are available: relay  
output models, sink-type transistor output models, and source-type transistor  
output models.  
CPM1A-10CDR-j/10CDT-D/10CDT1-D CPM1A-20CDR-j/20CDT-D/20CDT1-D  
(10 I/O terminals)  
(20 I/O terminals)  
CPM1A-30CDR-j/30CDT-D/30CDT1-D CPM1A-40CDR-j/40CDT-D/40CDT1-D  
(30 I/O terminals) (40 I/O terminals)  
Extra I/O Capacity  
Up to three Expansion I/O Units can be connected to a CPM1A-30CDR-j/  
30CDT-D/30CDT1-D or CPM1A-40CDR-j/40CDT-D/40CDT1-D CPU Unit to  
add an extra 8 or 20 I/O points for each, for a maximum of up to 100 I/O points.  
Input Filter Function  
The CPM1A is equipped with a filter function to prevent incorrect operation  
caused by chatter or noise in the input signal. The user can select an input time  
constant of 1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms, 8 ms, 16 ms, 32 ms, 64 ms, or 128 ms.  
Low-maintenance Design  
Input Interrupts  
Flash memory provides memory backup without a battery.  
The CPM1A-10CDR-j/10CDT-D/10CDT1-D CPU Units can handle 2 interrupt  
inputs; the CPM1A-20CDR-j/20CDT-D/20CDT1-D, CPM1A-30CDR-j/  
30CDT-D/30CDT1-D, and CPM1A-40CDR-j/40CDT-D/40CDT1-D CPU Units  
can handle 4 interrupt inputs. In addition to normal input interrupts, the CPM1A  
has a counter mode that counts high-speed input signals and triggers interrupts  
at fixed count multiples.  
Quick-response Inputs  
Interval Timer  
Quick-response inputs can detect input signals with a pulse width as short as  
0.2 ms regardless of their timing during the PC cycle. Quick-response inputs  
and interrupt inputs use the same input terminals.  
CPM1A PCs have a high-speed interval timer which can be set from 0.5 ms to  
319,968 ms. The timer can be set to trigger a single interrupt (one-shot mode) or  
repeat scheduled interrupts (scheduled interrupt mode).  
High-speed Counter  
CPM1A PCs have a high-speed counter that can be used in incremental mode  
or up/down mode. The high-speed counter can be combined with input inter-  
rupts to perform target value control or zone comparison control that isn’t  
affected by the PC’s cycle time.  
Pulse Output Function  
Analog Setting Function  
The CPM1A transistor output models have an output function capable of output-  
ting a pulse of 20 Hz to 2 kHz (single-phase output).  
The CPM1A PCs have 2 analog volume controls that can be used to make  
manual analog settings.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CPM1A Features and Functions  
Section 1-1  
Analog I/O Units  
Up to 3 Analog I/O Units can be connected to provide analog inputs and outputs.  
Each Unit provides 2 analog inputs and 1 analog output, so a maximum of 6 ana-  
log inputs and 3 analog outputs can be achieved by connecting 3 Analog I/O  
Units.  
The analog input range can be set to 0 to 10 VDC, 1 to 5 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA with a  
resolution of 1/256. (The open-circuit detection function can be used with the 1 to  
5 VDC and 4 to 20 mA settings.)  
The analog output range can be set to 0 to 10 VDC, 10 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA  
with a resolution of 1/256.  
Temperature Sensor  
Units  
A Temperature Sensor Unit can be connected to provide up to 6 inputs for tem-  
perature input from sensors, such as thermocouples or platinum resistance  
thermometers.  
Host Link Communications The CPM1A PCs are compatible with the Host Link, which allows communica-  
tions with personal computers. The CPM1A using the Host Link can also com-  
municate with Programmable Terminal using host link commands.  
An RS-232C Adapter is used for 1:1 communications and an RS-422 Adapter is  
used for 1:N communications.  
One-to-one PC Link  
A data link can be created with a data area in another CPM1A, CQM1, CPM1,  
SRM1 or C200HS or C200HX/HE/HG PC. An RS-232C Adapter is used to make  
the 1:1 connection.  
NT Link Communications  
High-speed operations can be achieved by providing a direct access by con-  
necting the CPM1A to the OMRON Programmable Terminal through the NT Link  
Interface. An RS-232C Adapter is used for this connection.  
CompoBus/S I/O Link  
Units  
Up to 3 CompoBus/S I/O Link Units can be connected to make the CPM1A a  
Slave Device in a CompoBus/S Network. The I/O Link Unit has 8 input bits (inter-  
nal) and 8 output bits (internal).  
The CompoBus/S Network provides distributed CPU control based on a PC +  
compact PCconfiguration, which is an improvement on the earlier distributed  
I/O control based on a PC + remote I/Oconfiguration. The distributed CPU  
control makes equipment modular, so designs can be standardized, special  
needs can be addressed, and modules can be replaced easily in the event of a  
breakdown.  
CompoBus/S Master Unit  
(or SRM1 CompoBus/S Master Control Unit)  
Master PC  
CPM1A (Slave) CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit  
CompoBus/S  
Distributed CPU control  
Standard Peripheral Devices The CPM1A uses the same Programming Consoles and SYSMAC Support  
Software (SSS) as the C200H/HS, C200HX/HE/HG, CPM1, SRM1, and CQM1  
PCs.  
Programming is Possible  
Using the PT  
Programming operation is possible through the PT screen by using an OMRON  
PT that has a built-in Programming Console function.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CPM1A Features and Functions  
Section 1-1  
Expansion Memory Unit  
The CPM1-EMU01-V1 Expansion Memory Unit is a program loader for small-  
size or micro PLCs. Using the CPM1-EMU01-V1, simple on-site transfer of user  
programs and data memory is possible with PLCs.  
Uploading  
Download-  
ing  
EEPROM  
SYSMAC  
1-1-2 I/O Terminal and IR Bit Allocation  
The following table shows which IR bits are allocated to the I/O terminals on the  
CPM1As CPU Units and Expansion I/O Unit.  
CPU Units  
Number of I/O terminals on 10  
20  
30  
40  
the CPU Unit  
Power supply  
AC  
DC  
AC  
DC  
AC  
DC  
AC  
DC  
Model  
Relay output  
CPM1A-  
CPM1A-  
CPM1A-  
CPM1A-  
CPM1A-  
CPM1A-  
CPM1A-  
CPM1A-  
number  
10CDR-A  
10CDR-D  
20CDR-A  
20CDR-D  
30CDR-A  
30CDR-D  
40CDR-A  
40CDR-D  
Tran-  
sistor  
output  
Sink  
type  
---  
CPM1A-  
10CDT-D  
---  
CPM1A-  
20CDT-D  
---  
CPM1A-  
30CDT-D  
---  
CPM1A-  
40CDT-D  
Source ---  
CPM1A-  
---  
CPM1A-  
---  
CPM1A-  
---  
CPM1A-  
type  
10CDT1-D  
20CDT1-D  
30CDT1-D  
40CDT1-D  
CPU Unit  
terminals  
Inputs  
6 points:  
00000 to 00005  
12 points:  
18 points:  
24 points:  
00000 to 00011  
00000 to 00011  
00100 to 00105  
12 points:  
00000 to 00011  
00100 to 00111  
16 points:  
Outputs 4 points:  
01000 to 01003  
8 points:  
01000 to 01007  
01000 to 01007  
01100 to 01103  
01000 to 01007  
01100 to 01107  
Expansion I/O Units  
Transistor output  
Unit  
I/O  
Relay output  
Sink type  
Source type  
20 I/O  
points  
12 inputs  
8 outputs  
CPM1A-20EDR  
CPM1A-20EDR1  
CPM1A-20EDT  
CPM1A-20EDT1  
8 inputs  
8 outputs  
8 inputs  
CPM1A-8ED  
8 outputs  
CPM1A-8ER  
CPM1A-8ET  
CPM1A-8ET1  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CPM1A Features and Functions  
Section 1-1  
1-1-3 CPM1A Functions  
Analog Setting Function  
CPM1A PCs have 2 variable-resistor adjustment knobs used to control analog  
timer and counter settings manually. When one of the adjustments is turned, the  
content of the corresponding IR word is set automatically between 0 and 200  
(BCD).  
Turn the adjustment knob with a Phillips screwdriver.  
Analog adjustment 0  
Analog adjustment 1  
24 VDC 0.2 A  
OUT PUT  
The following table shows which IR words are allocated to the analog adjust-  
ments on the CPM1As CPU Unit.  
Control  
Corresponding IR word  
Setting range (BCD)  
0000 to 0200  
Analog adjustment 0  
Analog adjustment 1  
IR 250  
IR 251  
Input Filter Function  
The input time constant for the CPM1As external inputs can be set to 1, 2, 4, 8,  
16, 32, 64, or 128 ms. Increasing the input time constant can reduce the effects  
of chatter or noise in the input signal.  
Input from an input device  
such as a limit switch  
Input bit status  
t
t
Input time constant  
With the CPM1A, actual response time for each set input time constant for word  
000 is different from that for word 001 or later.  
Set value  
Word 000  
1 to 1.5 ms  
Word 001 or later  
0.1 to 0.3 ms  
1 ms  
2 ms  
2 to 2.5 ms  
0.7 to 1.5 ms  
1.5 to 2.5 ms  
3 to 4.5 ms  
6 to 9 ms  
4 ms  
4 to 4.5 ms  
8 ms  
8 to 8.5 ms  
16 ms  
32 ms  
64 ms  
128 ms  
16 to 16.5 ms  
32 to 32.5 ms  
64 to 64.5 ms  
128 to 128.5 ms  
12 to 18 ms  
24 to 35 ms  
50 to 70 ms  
The input response time of the CPM1A is obtained with the following:  
2 ms max. (hardware performance) + input time constant (see above table)  
+ cycle time  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CPM1A Features and Functions  
Section 1-1  
Input Interrupts  
The CPM1A-10CDR-j/10CDT-D/10CDT1-D PCs have 2 interrupt input termi-  
nals and the CPM1A-20CDR-j/20CDT-D/20CDT1-D, CPM1A-30CDR-j/  
30CDT-D/30CDT1-D, and CPM1A-40CDR-j/40CDT-D/40CDT1-D PCs have  
4 interrupt input terminals. There are two modes for input interrupts: input inter-  
rupt mode and counter mode.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. When an interrupt occurs in Input Interrupt Mode, the main program is inter-  
rupted and the interrupt program is executed immediately, regardless of the  
cycle time.  
2. In Counter Mode, external input signals are counted at high speed (up to  
1 kHz) and an interrupt is generated each time the count reaches the set  
value. When an interrupt occurs, the main program is interrupted and the  
interrupt program is executed. The set value can be set from 0 to 65,535.  
The following diagram shows the program execution when an interrupt occurs.  
Main program  
Input interrupt  
MOV  
ADD  
Interrupt program  
SBN00  
MOV  
END  
RET  
PC model  
Input bits  
Response time  
0.3 ms  
(1 kHz in Counter Mode)  
CPM1A-10CDR-j /10CDT-D/ IR 00003 to IR 00004  
10CDT1-D  
CPM1A-20CDR-j /20CDT-D/ IR 00003 to IR 00006  
20CDT1-D/30CDR-j /  
30CDT-D/30CDT1-D/  
40CDR-j /40CDT-D/  
40CDT1-D  
Note When not using as interrupt input terminals, the input bits IR 00003 to IR 00006  
can be used as normal input terminals.  
Caution Although IORF(97) can be used in interrupt subroutines, you must be careful of  
the interval between IORF(97) executions. If IORF(97) is executed too frequent-  
ly, a fatal system error may occur (FALS 9F), stopping operation. The interval  
between executions of IORF(97) should be at least 1.3 ms + total execution time  
of the interrupt subroutine.  
!
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CPM1A Features and Functions  
Section 1-1  
Quick-response Inputs  
The CPM1A-10CDR-j/10CDT-D/10CDT1-D PCs have 2 quick-response input  
terminals and the CPM1A-20CDR-j/20CDT-D/20CDT1-D, CPM1A-  
30CDR-j/30CDT-D/30CDT1-D and CPM1A-40CDR-j/40CDT-D/40CDT1-D  
PCs have 4 quick-response input terminals. (The same terminals are used for  
quick-response inputs and interrupt inputs.)  
Quick-response inputs have an internal buffer, so input signals shorter than one  
cycle can be detected.  
Overseeing Program  
I/O  
refreshing  
Overseeing Program  
processes execution  
I/O  
refreshing  
processes  
execution  
Input signal  
(00003)  
IR 00003  
One cycle  
PC model  
Input bits  
Min. input pulse width  
0.2 ms  
CPM1A-10CDR-j /10CDT-D/ IR 00003 to IR 00004  
10CDT1-D  
CPM1A-20CDR-j /20CDT-D/ IR 00003 to IR 00006  
20CDT1-D/30CDR-j /  
30CDT-D/30CDT1-D/  
40CDR-j /40CDT-D/  
40CDT1-D  
Interval Timer Function  
(Scheduled Interrupts)  
CPM1A PCs are equipped with an interval timer which can be set from 0.5 ms to  
319,968 ms in units of 0.1 ms. The timer can be set to trigger a single interrupt  
(one-shot mode) or to trigger scheduled interrupts (scheduled interrupt mode).  
Main program  
Interval timer time-out  
MOV  
ADD  
Interrupt program  
SBN00  
MOV  
END  
RET  
Mode  
One-shot  
Function  
Generates a single interrupt the first time that the timer times  
out.  
Scheduled interrupt Generates an interrupt each time that the timer times out.  
Pulse Output Function  
Since the CPM1A with transistor output has a pulse output function capable of  
outputting a pulse of 20 Hz to 2kHz (single-phase output), a stepping motor can  
be controlled by the CPU Unit alone.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CPM1A Features and Functions  
Section 1-1  
The pulse output can be set to either the continuous mode, under which the out-  
put can be stopped by an instruction, or the single mode, under which the output  
can be stopped by the preset pulse rate (1 to 16,777,215).  
Stepping motor  
Stepping motor  
Control input  
Motor  
controller  
CW/CCW control output  
Pulse output  
(single-phase output)  
High-speed Counter  
CPM1A PCs have a high-speed counter that can be used in incremental mode  
or up/down mode. The high-speed counter can be combined with input inter-  
rupts to perform target value control or zone comparison control that isnt  
affected by the PCs cycle time.  
Count input  
Reset input  
Solenoid  
Sensor Rotary encoder  
Motor  
controller  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CPM1A Features and Functions  
Section 1-1  
Mode  
Input functions  
Input method  
Count  
frequency  
Count  
range  
Control methods  
Target value control:  
Up to 16 target values and interrupt  
subroutine numbers can be  
registered.  
Up/Down  
00000: A-phase input Phase-difference, 2.5 kHz  
00001: B-phase input 4× inputs  
00002: Z-phase input  
32767  
to  
32767  
Zone comparison control:  
Up to 8 sets of upper limit values,  
lower limit values, and interrupt  
subroutine numbers can be  
registered.  
Incremental 00000: Count input  
00001: See note.  
Individual inputs  
5.0 kHz  
0
to  
65535  
00002: Reset input  
Note In incremental mode, this input (00001) can be used as an regular input.  
Expansion Unit Functions  
Analog I/O Unit Functions (CPM1A-MAD01)  
Two analog inputs: input range 0 to 10 V, 1 to 5 V, or 4 to 20 mA  
One analog output: output range 0 to 10 V, 10 to 10 V, or 4 to 20 mA  
Temperature Sensor Unit Functions  
Thermocouple input (CPM1A-TS001/002; 2/4 input points):  
K: 200° to 1,300°C (300° to 2,300°F)  
0.0° to 500.0°C (0.0° to 900.0°F)  
J: 100° to 850°C (100° to 1,500°F)  
0.0° to 400.0°C (0.0° to 750.0°F)  
Platinum resistance thermometer input (CPM1A-TS101/102; 2/4 input points):  
Pt100: 200.0° to 650.0°C (300.0° to 1,200.0°F)  
JPt100: 200.0° to 650.0°C (300.0° to 1,200.0°F)  
CompoBus/S Slave Functions (CPM1A-SRT21)  
Exchanges 8 input bits and 8 output bits of data with the Master Unit.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration  
Section 1-2  
1-2 System Configuration  
1-2-1 CPU Unit and Expansion I/O Unit Configuration  
CPM1A CPU Units  
10 I/O points  
CPM1A-10CDR-  
j
CPM1A-10CDT-D  
CPM1A-10CDT1-D  
Not possible to add Expansion I/O Units  
or Expansion Units.  
20 I/O points  
CPM1A-20CDR-  
j
CPM1A-20CDT-D  
CPM1A-20CDT1-D  
Expansion I/O Units/Expansion Units  
30 I/O points  
CPM1A-30CDR-  
j
CPM1A-30CDT-D  
CPM1A-30CDT1-D  
40 I/O points  
CPM1A-40CDR-  
j
CPM1A-40CDT-D  
CPM1A-40CDT1-D  
CPM1A CPU Units  
Model number  
Number of  
I/O  
terminals  
Inputs  
Outputs  
Power  
supply  
Relay output  
Transistor output  
Sink type Source type  
10  
20  
30  
40  
6 points  
4 points  
AC  
CPM1A-10CDR-A  
CPM1A-10CDR-D  
CPM1A-20CDR-A  
CPM1A-20CDR-D  
CPM1A-30CDR-A  
CPM1A-30CDR-D  
CPM1A-40CDR-A  
CPM1A-40CDR-D  
---  
---  
DC  
AC  
DC  
AC  
DC  
AC  
DC  
CPM1A-10CDT-D  
CPM1A-10CDT1-D  
12 points  
18 points  
24 points  
8 points  
---  
---  
CPM1A-20CDT-D  
CPM1A-20CDT1-D  
12 points  
16 points  
---  
---  
CPM1A-30CDT-D  
---  
CPM1A-30CDT1-D  
---  
CPM1A-40CDT-D  
CPM1A-40CDT1-D  
1-2-2 CPU Unit and Expansion Unit  
Up to 3 Expansion I/O Units or Expansion Units can be connected to a CPU Unit  
with 30 or 40 I/O points.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration  
Section 1-2  
There are three models of Expansion Units available: the Analog I/O Unit, Com-  
poBus/S I/O Link Unit, and Temperature Sensor Units.  
Expansion Connector  
Expansion I/O Unit, Analog I/O Unit,  
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit, or Tem-  
perature Sensor Unit)  
Expansion I/O Connecting Cable  
A PC with 100 I/O points (the maximum) can be assembled by connecting three  
Expansion I/O Units.  
CPM1A-40CDR-A  
(24 inputs, 16 outputs)  
CPM1A-20EDR1  
× 1 Unit  
+
× 3 Units = 60 inputs, 40 outputs  
(12 inputs, 8 outputs)  
A PC with 6 analog inputs and 3 analog outputs (the maximum) can be as-  
sembled by connecting three Analog I/O Units.  
A PC with up to 6 temperature inputs for input from thermocouples or platinum  
resistance thermometers can be assembled by connecting Temperature Sensor  
Units.  
CompoBus/S I/O Link Units (Slave Units) can be connected to a CPU Unit. I/O  
data (8 inputs and 8 outputs) is transferred between the CPU Unit and the area  
allocated to the CompoBus/S Slave. (The I/O data exchanged with the Slave is  
internal data; there are no external input or output terminals.)  
Note Different types of Expansion Units can be connected at the same time. For ex-  
ample, an Expansion I/O Unit, Analog I/O Unit, and CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit,  
or an Expansion I/O Unit, Analog I/O Unit, and Temperature Sensor Unit can be  
connected to the CPU Unit.  
Expansion I/O Units  
20-point I/O Unit  
8-point Input Unit  
8-point Output Unit  
Unit  
Max. number  
of Units  
Inputs  
24 VDC  
Outputs  
Model  
20 I/O points  
3 Units max.  
(See note.)  
Relays  
CPM1A-20EDR1  
CPM1A-20EDT  
CPM1A-20EDT1  
CPM1A-8ED  
24 VDC  
24 VDC  
24 VDC  
---  
Sinking transistors  
Sourcing transistors  
---  
12 inputs  
8 outputs  
8 inputs  
8 outputs  
Relays  
CPM1A-8ER  
---  
Sinking Transistors  
Sourcing Transistors  
CPM1A-8ET  
---  
CPM1A-8ET1  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration  
Section 1-2  
Expansion Units  
Analog I/O Unit  
Temperature Sensor Unit  
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit  
Unit  
Analog I/O Unit  
Max. number  
of Units  
Inputs  
Outputs  
Model  
3 Units max.  
2 analog inputs  
1 analog output  
CPM1A-MAD01  
2 analog inputs (2 words)  
1 analog output (1 word)  
Temperature  
Sensor Unit  
Thermocouple  
inputs  
---  
3 Units max.  
2 inputs (K, J)  
CPM1A-TS001  
CPM1A-TS002  
CPM1A-TS101  
CPM1A-TS102  
CPM1A-SRT21  
1 Unit max.  
(See note.)  
4 inputs (K, J)  
Platinum  
resistance  
thermometer  
inputs  
3 Units max.  
2 inputs (Pt100, JPt100)  
4 inputs (Pt100, JPt100)  
8 bits  
1 Unit max.  
(See note.)  
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit  
8 inputs and 8 outputs  
3 Units max.  
8 bits  
(Inputs from the Master.) (Outputs to the Master.)  
Note Only one CPM1A-TS002/TS102 Temperature Sensor Unit can be connected to  
the CPU Unit. If a CPM1A-TS002/102 is connected to the CPU Unit, only one  
additional Expansion Unit (other than a CPM1A-TS002/102) or one Expansion  
I/O Unit can be connected to the CPU Unit.  
1-2-3 Host Link Communications  
Host Link communications which allows up to 32 OMRON PCs to be controlled  
from a host computer. The computer-PC connections can be made connectors  
such as RS-232C and RS-422 Adapters.  
One-to-one Communications The following diagram shows the possible methods for a 1:1 connection  
between a CPM1A and an IBM PC/AT or compatible computer.  
RS-232C Adapter  
CPM1A CPU Unit  
IBM PC/AT or  
compatible  
RS-232C Cable  
CQM1-CIF02  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration  
Section 1-2  
Connecting to a  
Programmable Terminal  
The following diagram shows the possible methods for a connection between a  
CPM1A PC and an OMRON Programmable Terminal (a operator interface  
device).  
OMRON Programmable Terminal  
RS-232C Adapter  
CPM1A CPU Unit  
RS-232C Cable  
One-to-N Communications  
The following diagram shows how to connect up to 32 CPM1A PCs to an IBM  
PC/AT or compatible computer.  
IBM PC/AT or compatible  
RS-422  
Adapters  
CPM1A CPU Units  
RS-232C Cable  
RS-422 Cable  
3G2A9-AL004-E  
Link Adapter  
OMRON CPM1A PCs  
(32 PCs max.)  
The maximum cable length of RS-422 should be 500 m.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration  
Section 1-2  
Adapters and Cables  
The following table lists some of the Adapters and Cables used in Host Link com-  
munications.  
Name  
Usage  
Model number  
CPM1-CIF01  
CPM1-CIF11  
CQM1-CIF02  
Converts to peripheral port-level  
communications.  
RS-232C Adapter  
RS-422 Adapter  
Connecting Cables Used to connect IBM PC/AT or  
compatible computers.  
(Cable length: 3.3 m)  
Link Adapter  
Converts between the RS-232C and  
RS-422 formats.  
3G2A9-AL004-E  
1-2-4 One-to-one PC Link Communications  
A data link can be created with a data area in another CPM1A, CQM1, CPM1,  
CPM2A, CPM2C, SRM1(-V2) or C200HS PC or a C200HX/HE/HG PC. An  
RS-232C Adapter must be used to make the 1:1 connection.  
RS-232C Adapters  
RS-232C Cable  
CPM1A CPU Units  
CQM1  
CPM1 + RS-232C Adapter  
C200HS/C200HX/HG/HE  
Name  
Usage  
Converts to the Peripheral Port format.  
Model number  
RS-232C Adapter  
CPM1-CIF01  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration  
Section 1-2  
1-2-5 One-to-one NT Link Communications  
Using the NT Link, the CPM1A PC can connected to the Programmable Termi-  
nal (NT Link Interface) through an RS-232C Adapter.  
RS-232C  
Adapter  
CPM1A CPU Unit  
OMRON Programmable Terminal  
RS-232C Cable  
WX2Z-200T (2 m)  
WX2Z-500T (5 m)  
Name  
Usage  
Model number  
RS-232C Adapter  
Converts to peripheral port-level  
communications.  
CPM1-CIF01  
1-2-6 CompoBus/S I/O Link Connections  
A CompoBus/S I/O Link can be used to create an I/O link (remote I/O) of 8 input  
points and 8 output points with a CompoBus/S Master Unit or SRM1 PC. The  
connection is made through a CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit.  
From the standpoint of the CPM1A CPU Unit, the area allocated to the Compo-  
Bus/S I/O Link Unit can be treated just like the area allocated to an Expansion I/O  
Unit. The difference is that the bits are not actual I/O points, but I/O bits in the  
Master Unit.  
CompoBus/S Master Unit (or SRM1 PC)  
SYSMAC CS1-series PC  
CPM1A CPU Unit  
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit  
(Slave)  
Cables  
Use special flat cable or VCTF cable to connect the nodes in the CompoBus/S  
I/O Link. (Special flat cables and VCTF cables cannot be combined in the same  
system.)  
Name  
Flat cable  
Specifications  
2
4-core flat cable, 0.75 mm  
2
VCTF cable  
2-core x 0.75 mm  
1-2-7 Peripheral Device Connections  
CPM1A programs can be created or edited with a Programming Console or a  
personal computer running SYSMAC Support Software (SSS).  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Configuration  
Section 1-2  
Programming Consoles  
A CQM1-PRO01-E or C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console can be con-  
nected to the CPM1A as shown in the following diagram.  
CPM1A CPU Unit  
C200H-CN222/422  
CQM1-PRO01-E C200H-PRO27-E  
Name  
CQM1 Programming Console  
(The Connecting Cable is included.)  
C200H/HS and C200HX/HE/HG Programming Console C200H-PRO27-E  
Model number  
CQM1-PRO01-E  
C200H-series Connecting Cables  
Cable length: 2 m  
Cable length: 4 m  
C200H-CN222  
C200H-CN422  
SYSMAC Support Software  
and SYSMAC-CPT Support  
Software  
An IBM PC/AT or compatible personal computer running SSS or the SYSMAC-  
CPT Support Software can be connected to the CPM1A as shown in the follow-  
ing diagram. Refer to 3-4-7 Host Link Connections for a diagram showing the  
standard wiring for the RS-232C cable.  
Any version of the Support Software may be used. Refer to 4-1 Support Soft-  
ware Capabilities for further details on installing and using Support Software.  
RS-232C Adapter  
CPM1A CPU Unit  
IBM PC/AT or compatible  
RS-232C Cable  
CQM1-CIF02  
SSS,  
SYSMAC-CPT  
Name  
Usage  
Converts to Peripheral Port format level communications.  
Model number  
RS-232C Adapter  
Connecting Cable  
CPM1-CIF01  
Used to connect IBM PC/AT or compatible computers. (Length: 3.3 m) CQM1-CIF02  
SYSMAC Support Software For IBM PC/AT or compatible computers (3.5disks, 2HD)  
C500-ZL3AT1-E  
WS01-CPTB1-E  
SYSMAC-CPT Support  
Software  
For IBM PC/AT or compatible computers  
(3.5disks (2HD) and CDROM)  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Revised Specifications  
Section 1-3  
1-3 Revised Specifications  
The following table shows the changes that have been made in product specifi-  
cations beginning with lots produced in January 1998 (December 1997 for some  
models).  
Item  
Previous specifications  
New specifications  
Relevant pages  
Input indicator operation  
when an error occurs  
The input indicators will  
maintain the current status change with the status of  
and will not change with the the input signal when a  
The input indicators will  
Item 8., Input Indicators, on  
page 29.  
status of the input signal  
when a memory error, no  
END instruction error, or  
system error occurs.  
memory error, no END  
instruction error, or system  
error occurs.  
Memory holding operation  
of built-in capacitor  
If the power remains OFF  
If the power remains OFF  
Pages xiii to xvi under 5  
Application Precautions.  
for a period exceeding the for a period exceeding the  
data backup period, the data backup period,  
capacitor will not be able to AR 1314 will turn ON to  
back up data and the  
status of the data backed  
up by the capacitor  
Page 22 under 2-1-2  
Characteristics.  
indicate that the capacitor  
can no longer back up data  
and the data backed up by  
See also information on the  
PC Setup in the  
CPM1/CPM1A/CPM2A/CPM2  
C/SRM1(-V2) Programmable  
Controllers Programming  
Manual (W353).  
(Read/write DM area, Error the capacitor (Read/write  
log area, HR area, and DM area, Error log area,  
Counter area) will become HR area, and Counter  
unstable.  
area) will be cleared. The  
PC Setup setting in  
DM 6604 can be set to  
create a fatal error and thus  
stop the system when  
AR 1314 goes ON.  
Online editing and changing If unsupported addresses  
If unsupported addresses  
are set in the program for  
4-1-2 CPM1A Restrictions and  
Precautions  
set values from the SSS  
are set in the program for  
operands or for set values operands or for set values  
for timers or counters from for timers or counters from  
the SSS during online  
editing, the values will be  
accepted, but a memory  
error will occur in  
the SSS during online  
editing, error messages will  
be displayed and the  
values will not be accepted.  
MONITOR or RUN mode.  
Communications  
parameters for the  
peripheral port  
Communications are not  
possible if unsupported  
settings are made for the  
peripheral ports  
communications  
parameters.  
Communications are  
possible using the following Setup in the  
parameters if unsupported CPM1/CPM1A/CPM2A/CPM2  
settings are made for the  
peripheral ports  
communications  
parameters.  
See information on the PC  
C/SRM1(-V2) Programmable  
Controllers Programming  
Manual (W353).  
Mode: Host Link  
Standard format  
1 start bit  
7-bit data  
Even parity  
2 stop bits  
9,600 bps baud  
Transmission delay: None  
Unit number: 0  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECTION 2  
Unit Specifications and Components  
This section provides the technical specifications of the Units that go together to create a CPM1A PC and describes the main  
components of the Units.  
2-1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-1-1 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-1-2 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-1-3 I/O Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-1-4 Communications Adapter Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-2 Unit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-2-1 CPU Unit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-2-2 Expansion I/O Unit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-2-3 Analog I/O Unit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-2-4 Temperature Sensor Unit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-2-5 CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2-2-6 Communications Adapter Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
20  
20  
21  
23  
27  
28  
28  
30  
31  
31  
33  
34  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Section 2-1  
2-1 Specifications  
2-1-1 General Specifications  
Item  
CPM1A-10CDR-  
j
CPM1A-20CDR-  
j
CPM1A-30CDR-  
j
CPM1A-40CDR-  
j
CPM1A-10CDT-D  
CPM1A-20CDT-D  
CPM1A-30CDT-D  
CPM1A-40CDT-D  
CPM1A-10CDT1-D CPM1A-20CDT1-D CPM1A-30CDT1-D CPM1A-40CDT1-D  
Supply voltage  
AC type  
100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz  
24 VDC  
DC type  
AC type  
DC type  
AC type  
DC type  
Operating  
voltage range  
85 to 264 VAC  
20.4 to 26.4 VDC  
Power  
consumption  
30 VA max.  
6 W max.  
30 A max.  
60 VA max.  
20 W max.  
38 A max.  
Inrush current  
External power  
supply  
Supply voltage 24 VDC  
(AC type only)  
(see note)  
Output capacity 200 mA  
300 mA  
Insulation resistance  
Dielectric strength  
20 Mmin. (at 500 VDC) between the external AC terminals and protective earth  
terminals  
2,300 VAC 50/60 Hz for 1 min between the external AC and protective earth  
terminals, leakage current: 10 mA max.  
Noise immunity  
Conforms to IEC6100-4-4; 2 kV (power lines)  
2
Vibration resistance  
10 to 57 Hz, 0.075-mm amplitude, 57 to 150 Hz, acceleration: 9.8 m/s in X, Y, and Z  
directions for 80 minutes each  
(Time coefficient; 8 minutes × coefficient factor 10 = total time 80 minutes)  
2
Shock resistance  
147 m/s three times each in X, Y, and Z directions  
Ambient temperature  
Operating: 0° to 55°C  
Storage: 20° to 75°C  
Humidity  
10% to 90% (with no condensation)  
Must be free from corrosive gas  
M3  
Atmosphere  
Terminal screw size  
Grounding  
Less than 100 W  
Power interrupt time  
AC type: 10 ms min.  
DC type: 2 ms min.  
(A power interruption occurs if power falls below 85% of the rated voltage for longer  
than the power interrupt time.)  
CPU Unit  
weight  
AC type  
DC type  
400 g max.  
300 g max.  
500 g max.  
400 g max.  
600 g max.  
500 g max.  
700 g max.  
600 g max.  
Expansion I/O Unit weight  
Units with 20 I/O points:  
Units with 8 output points:  
Units with 8 input points:  
300 g max.  
250 g max.  
200 g max.  
Expansion Unit weight  
Analog I/O Unit:  
Temperature Sensor Units: 250 g max.  
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit:200 g max.  
150 g max.  
Note Use the external power supply as the service power supply of input devices. The  
power supply cannot be used for driving output devices.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Section 2-1  
2-1-2 Characteristics  
Item  
CPM1A-10CDR-  
j
CPM1A-10CDT-D  
CPM1A-10CDT1-D  
CPM1A-20CDR-  
CPM1A-20CDT-D  
CPM1A-20CDT1-D  
j
CPM1A-30CDR-  
CPM1A-30CDT-D  
CPM1A-30CDT1-D  
j
CPM1A-40CDR-  
j
CPM1A-40CDT-D  
CPM1A-40CDT1-D  
Control method  
Stored program method  
I/O control method  
Programming language  
Instruction length  
Cyclic scan with direct output; immediate refresh processing  
Ladder diagram  
1 step per instruction, 1 to 5 words per instruction  
Types of instructions  
Basic instructions:  
Special instructions: 77 types, 135 instructions  
Basic instructions:  
14  
Execution time  
0.72 to 16.2 µs  
Special instructions: 16.3 µs (MOV instruction)  
Program capacity  
2,048 words  
Max. I/O  
capacity  
CPU Unit only 10 points  
20 points  
---  
30 points  
50, 70, or 90 points  
40 points  
With  
---  
60, 80, or 100 points  
Expansion I/O  
Units  
Words not used for input or output bits can  
be used for work bits.  
Input bits  
Output bits  
Work bits  
00000 to 00915  
01000 to 01915  
512 bits: 20000 to 23115 (Words IR 200 to IR 231)  
384 bits: 23200 to 25515 (Words IR 232 to IR 255)  
Special bits (SR area)  
Temporary bits (TR area) 8 bits (TR0 to TR7)  
Holding bits (HR area)  
Auxiliary bits (AR area)  
Link bits (LR area)  
Timers/Counters  
320 bits: HR 0000 to HR 1915 (Words HR 00 to HR 19)  
256 bits: AR 0000 to AR 1515 (Words AR 00 to AR 15)  
256 bits: LR 0000 to LR 1515 (Words LR 00 to LR 15)  
128 timers/counters (TIM/CNT 000 to TIM/CNT 127)  
100-ms timers: TIM 000 to TIM 127  
10-ms timers (high-speed counter): TIM 000 to TIM 127 (see note 1)  
(the timer numbers used are the same as for the 100-ms timers)  
Decrementing counters and reversible counters  
Data memory  
Read/Write: 1,024 words (DM 0000 to DM 1023)  
Read-only: 512 words (DM 6144 to DM 6655)  
Interrupt processing  
(see note 2)  
External interrupts: 2 External interrupts: 4  
Interval timer interrupts  
Memory protection  
1 (0.5 to 319,968 ms in Scheduled Interrupt Mode or Single Interrupt Mode)  
HR and read/write DM area contents; and counter values maintained during power  
interruptions.  
Memory backup  
Flash memory:  
The program, read-only DM area, and PC Setup area are backed up without a battery.  
Capacitor backup:  
The read/write DM area, error log area, HR area, and counter values are backed up by a  
capacitor for 20 days at 25_ C. The capacitor backup time depends on the ambient  
temperature. See the graph on the following page for details.  
Self-diagnostic functions CPU Unit failure (watchdog timer), I/O bus error, and memory failure  
Program checks  
No END instruction, programming errors (continuously checked during operation)  
High-speed counter  
One high-speed counter: 5 kHz single-phase or 2.5 kHz two-phase (linear count method)  
Increment mode: 0 to 65,535 (16 bits)  
Up/Down mode: 32,767 to 32,767 (16 bits)  
Quick-response inputs  
Pulse output  
The same inputs are used for quick-response inputs and external interrupt inputs.  
(Min. input pulse width: 0.2 ms)  
One point, 20 Hz to 2 kHz (single-phase output)  
Can preset the pulse rate (1 to 16,777,215).  
Input time constant  
Analog controls  
Can be set to 1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms, 8 ms, 16 ms, 32 ms, 64 ms, or 128 ms.  
2 controls, setting range: 0 to 200 BCD  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Section 2-1  
Note 1. Use TIM 000 to TIM 003 when creating a timer using the high-speed timer  
instruction to perform interrupt processing.  
2. The input interrupt response time is 0.3 ms max.  
Memory Backup  
The user program and memory area data in the CPM1A are backed up either by  
an internal capacitor or in flash memory as shown in the following table.  
Backup method  
Data  
Internal capacitor  
Read/write DM area (DM 0000 to DM 0999, DM 1022, and  
DM 1023)  
Error log area (DM 1000 to DM 1021)  
HR area (HR 00 to HR 19)  
Counter area (CNT 000 to CNT 127)  
User program  
Flash memory  
Read-only DM area (DM 6144 to DM 6599)  
PC Setup (DM 6600 to DM 6655)  
Note 1. The IR, TR, LR, and timer areas are not normally backed up when power is  
turned off and all contents will be cleared the next time power is turned on.  
(The PC Setup setting in DM 6601 can be used to back up this data. Refer to  
details on the PC Setup later in this manual for details.)  
2. The bits in the AR and SR areas have special functions and are set accord-  
ing to these functions when power is turned on.  
The capacitor backup time depends on the ambient temperature, as shown in  
the following graph. The backup time, however, assumes that the capacitor is  
fully charged, which requires that power be supplied to the CPU Unit continu-  
ously for at least 15 minutes.  
20  
10  
7
1
25  
40  
80  
Ambient temperature (_ C)  
If the power remains off for a period exceeding the data backup period,  
AR 1314 will turn ON to indicate that the capacitor can no longer back up data  
and the data backed up by the capacitor will be cleared. AR 1314 will remain  
ON unless it is turned OFF using I/O monitor operations, using memory clear  
operations, or from the user program.  
If desired, the PC Setup setting in DM 6604 can be set to create a fatal error  
and thus stop the system when AR 1314 goes ON.  
The data stored in flash memory will not be lost even if power remains off for a  
period exceeding the data backup period, because the data stored in flash  
memory will be read to the CPU Unit when the CPM1A is turned on.  
If the power is turned off without changing the mode from PROGRAM mode to  
RUN or MONITOR mode after having made changes in the data that is backed  
up in flash memory, the changes will not be written to flash memory. If the power  
is then left off for more than 20 days (at 25_ C), the changes (i.e., the contents of  
the RAM) will be erased and the data values will become undefined.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Section 2-1  
Either switch the CPM1A to RUN or MONITOR mode, or turn off and on power to  
the CPM1A after changing from a Programming Device any data that is backed  
up in flash memory. This data includes the user program, read-only DM area  
(DM 6144 to DM 6599), and the PC Setup (DM 6600 to DM 6655).  
2-1-3 I/O Specifications  
CPU Unit Input Specifications  
Item  
Specification  
+10%  
Input voltage  
Input impedance  
Input current  
ON voltage  
24 VDC  
/
15%  
IN00000 to IN00002: 2 k; other inputs: 4.7 kΩ  
IN00000 to IN00002: 12 mA typical; other inputs: 5 mA typical  
14.4 VDC min.  
OFF voltage  
ON delay  
5.0 VDC max.  
1 to 128 ms max. Default: 8 ms (see note.)  
1 to 128 ms max. Default: 8 ms (see note.)  
IN  
OFF delay  
Circuit configuration  
Input  
LED  
4.7 kΩ  
IN  
(2 k)  
Internal  
Circuits  
820 Ω  
(510 )  
COM  
Note Figures in parentheses are for IN00000 to IN00002.  
Note Using the PC Setup, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, or 128 ms can be selected. When  
IN00000 through IN00002 are used as high-speed counter inputs, the delays  
are as shown in the following table.  
Input  
Increment mode  
Differential phase mode  
2.5 kHz  
IN00000 (A-phase)  
IN00001 (B-phase)  
IN00002 (Z-phase)  
5 kHz  
Normal input  
ON: 100 µs min.; OFF delay: 500 µs min.  
The minimum delay is as follows.  
Increment Mode (5 kHz Max.)  
200 µs min.  
90 µs  
min.  
ON  
A phase  
OFF  
90 µs  
min.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Section 2-1  
Differential Phase Mode (2.5 kHz Max.) IN00000 (A phase), IN00001 (B  
phase)  
400 µs min.  
ON  
Phase A  
OFF  
ON  
Phase B  
OFF  
T
T
T
T
4
1
2
3
T T T T : 90 µs min.  
1
2
3
4
IN00002 (Z phase)  
100 µs min.  
ON  
Phase Z  
OFF  
500 µs  
min.  
When IN00003 through IN00006 are used as interrupt inputs, the delay is 0.3 ms  
max. The delay is measured from the time that the input goes ON until the inter-  
rupt subroutine is executed.  
Expansion I/O Unit Input Specifications  
Item  
Specification  
+10%  
Input voltage  
Input impedance  
Input current  
ON voltage  
24 VDC  
/
15%  
4.7 kΩ  
5 mA typical  
14.4 VDC min.  
5.0 VDC max.  
OFF voltage  
ON delay  
1 to 128 ms max. Default: 8 ms (see note.)  
OFF delay  
1 to 128 ms max. Default: 8 ms (see note.)  
IN  
Circuit configuration  
Input  
LED  
IN 4.7 kΩ  
Internal  
Circuits  
820 Ω  
COM  
Note Using the PC Setup, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, or 128 ms can be selected.  
Caution Do not apply voltage in excess of the rated voltage to the input terminal. It may  
!
result in damage to the product or fire.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Section 2-1  
CPU Unit and Expansion I/O Unit Output Specifications  
Relay Output  
Item  
Specification  
Max. switching capacity  
2 A, 250 VAC (cosφ = 1)  
2 A, 24 VDC  
(4 A/common)  
Min. switching capacity  
Service life of relay  
10 mA, 5 VDC  
Electrical: 150,000 operations (resistive load, 24 VDC) 100,000 operations (inductive  
load, 220 VAC, cos φ=0.4)  
Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations  
ON delay  
15 ms max.  
15 ms max.  
OFF delay  
Circuit configuration  
OUT  
Output  
LED  
Internal  
OUT  
Circuits  
COM  
Maximum  
250 VAC: 2 A  
24 VDC: 2 A  
Note The service life of relay output contacts shown in the table assumes the worst  
conditions. The following graph shows the results of OMRONs service life tests  
at a switching rate of 1,800 times/hour.  
500  
120 VAC, resistive load  
300  
24 VDC, τ = 7 ms  
200  
120 VAC, cosφ = 0.4  
240 VAC, cosφ = 0.4  
24 VDC/240 VAC, resistive load  
100  
50  
30  
20  
10  
5
Switching rate: 1,800 times/hour  
3
2
0.1  
0.2 0.3  
0.5 0.7  
1
2
3
5
Contact current (A)  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Section 2-1  
Transistor Output (Sink Type)  
Item  
Specification  
CPM1A-10CDT-D CPM1A-20CDT-D CPM1A-30CDT-D CPM1A-40CDT-D  
/-20EDT  
/-8ET  
+10%  
Max. switching capacity  
24 VDC  
/
, 0.3 A/point (see note)  
15%  
0.9 A/Unit  
0.9 A/common  
1.8 A/Unit  
0.9 A/common  
2.7 A/Unit  
0.9 A/common  
3.6 A/Unit  
Leakage current  
Residual voltage  
ON delay  
0.1 mA max.  
1.5 V max.  
0.1 ms max.  
OFF delay  
OUT01000/01001:  
0.2 ms max. (load current: 100 to 300 mA)  
0.5 ms max. (load current: 5 to 100 mA)  
Other than OUT01000/01001: 1 ms max. (load current: 5 to 300 mA)  
Fuse  
1.25 A/common (cannot be replaced by the user)  
Circuit configuration  
OUT  
Output LED  
Internal  
Circuits  
OUT  
24 VDC  
COM ()  
Note When using the OUT01000 or OUT01001 as a pulse output, connect dummy  
resistors as required to set the load current to 0.1 to 0.2 A. If the load current is  
below 0.1 A, the ON-to-OFF response time will become longer and high-speed  
pulse will not be output. On the other hand, if the load current is above 0.2 A, the  
transistor may generate heat and components may be damaged.  
Transistor Output (Source Type)  
Specification  
Item  
CPM1A-  
10CDT1-D  
CPM1A-  
CPM1A-  
30CDT1-D  
CPM1A-  
40CDT1-D  
20CDT1-D  
/-20EDT1  
/-8ET1  
+10%  
Max. switching capacity  
24 VDC  
/
, 0.3 A/point (see note)  
15%  
0.9 A/Unit  
0.9 A/common  
1.8 A/Unit  
0.9 A/common  
2.7 A/Unit  
0.9 A/common  
3.6 A/Unit  
Leakage current  
Residual voltage  
ON delay  
0.1 mA max.  
1.5 V max.  
0.1 ms max.  
OFF delay  
OUT01000/01001:  
0.2 ms max. (load current: 100 to 300 mA)  
0.5 ms max. (load current: 5 to 100 mA)  
Other than OUT01000/01001: 1 ms max. (load current: 5 to 300 mA)  
Fuse  
1.25 A/common (cannot be replaced by the user)  
Circuit configuration  
Output LED  
COM (+)  
Internal  
Circuits  
24 VDC  
OUT  
OUT  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Section 2-1  
Note When using the OUT01000 or OUT01001 as a pulse output, connect dummy  
resistors as required to set the load current to 0.1 to 0.2 A. If the load current is  
below 0.1 A, the ON-to-OFF response time will become longer and high-speed  
pulse will not be output. On the other hand, if the load current is above 0.2 A, the  
transistor may generate heat and components may be damaged.  
Caution Do not apply voltage in excess of the maximum switching capacity to an output  
!
terminal. It may result in damage to the product or fire.  
2-1-4 Communications Adapter Specifications  
RS-232C Adapter Specifications  
Item  
Specification  
Function  
Converts between the CMOS format (PC CPU Unit side) and the RS-232C format  
(peripheral device side).  
Insulation  
The RS-232C (peripheral device side) is isolated by a DC/DC convertor and photocoupler.  
Power supply  
Power is supplied from the PC CPU Unit.  
0.3 A max.  
Power consumption  
Baud rate  
38,400 bps max.  
Transmission distance  
Vibration resistance  
Total length:15 m max.  
10 to 57 Hz: 0.075-mm amplitude  
2
57 to 150 Hz: 9.8 m/s acceleration in X, Y, and Z directions for 80 minutes each  
(Time coefficient; 8 minutes × coefficient factor 10 = total time 80 minutes)  
2
Shock resistance  
147 m/s three times each in X, Y, and Z directions  
Ambient temperature  
Operating: 0° to 55°C  
Storage: 20° to 75°C  
Humidity  
Atmosphere  
Weight  
10% to 90% (with no condensation)  
Must be free from corrosive gas  
200 g max.  
RS-422 Adapter Specifications  
Item  
Specification  
Function  
Converts between the CMOS format (PC CPU Unit side) and the RS-422 format (peripheral  
device side).  
Insulation  
The RS-422 (peripheral device side) is isolated by a DC/DC convertor and photocoupler.  
Power supply  
Power is supplied from the PC CPU Unit.  
0.3 A max.  
Power consumption  
Baud rate  
38,400 bps max.  
Transmission distance  
Vibration resistance  
Total length: 500 m max.  
10 to 57 Hz: 0.075-mm amplitude  
2
57 to 150 Hz: 9.8 m/s acceleration in X, Y, and Z directions for 80 minutes each  
(Time coefficient; 8 minutes × coefficient factor 10 = total time 80 minutes)  
2
Shock resistance  
147 m/s three times each in X, Y, and Z directions  
Ambient temperature  
Operating: 0° to 55°C  
Storage: 20° to 75°C  
Humidity  
Atmosphere  
Weight  
10% to 90% (with no condensation)  
Must be free from corrosive gas  
200 g max.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Unit Components  
Section 2-2  
2-2 Unit Components  
2-2-1 CPU Unit Components  
CPM1A-10CDR-j /10CDT-D/10CDT1-D: 10 I/O Terminals  
2. Functional earth terminal  
(AC power supplies only)  
3. Protective earth terminal  
1. Power supply input terminals  
5. Input terminals  
8. Input indicators  
10. Analog controls  
11. Peripheral Port  
7. PC status indicators  
9. Output indicators  
4. Power supply output terminals  
(AC power supplies only)  
6. Output terminals  
CPM1A-20CDR-j /20CDT-D/20CDT1-D: 20 I/O Terminals  
CPM1A-30CDR-j /30CDT-D/30CDT1-D: 30 I/O Terminals  
CPM1A-40CDR-j /40CDT-D/40CDT1-D: 40 I/O Terminals  
12. Expansion I/O Unit connector  
12. Expansion I/O Unit connector  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Unit Components  
Section 2-2  
CPU Unit Component Descriptions  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Power Supply Input Terminals  
Connect the power supply (100 to 240 VAC or 24 VDC) to these terminals.  
2. Functional Earth Terminal (  
)
Be sure to ground this terminal (AC-type PCs only) to enhance immunity to  
noise and reduce the risk of electric shock.  
3. Protective Earth Terminal (  
)
Be sure to ground this terminal to reduce the risk of electric shock.  
4. Power Supply Output Terminals  
CPM1A PCs are equipped with these 24-VDC power output terminals to  
supply power to input devices. (AC-type PCs only.)  
5. Input Terminals  
Connect the Unit to external input devices.  
6. Output Terminals  
Connect the Unit to external output devices.  
7. PC Status Indicators  
These indicators show the operating status of the PC, as shown in the fol-  
lowing table.  
Indicator  
Status  
ON  
Meaning  
PWR (green)  
Power is being supplied to the PC.  
Power isnt being supplied to the PC.  
The PC is operating in RUN or MONITOR mode.  
OFF  
ON  
RUN (green)  
OFF  
The PC is in PROGRAM mode or a fatal error  
has occurred.  
ERR/ALARM  
(red)  
ON  
A fatal error has occurred. (PC operation stops.)  
Flashing A non-fatal error has occurred. (PC operation  
continues.)  
OFF  
ON  
Indicates normal operation.  
COMM (orange)  
Data is being transferred via the Peripheral Port.  
OFF  
Data isnt being transferred via the Peripheral  
Port.  
8. Input Indicators  
These indicators are lit when the corresponding input terminal is ON.  
When a fatal error occurs, the input indicators change as follows:  
Fatal error  
Input indicators  
CPU Unit error or I/O bus error  
Turn OFF.  
Memory error, no END instruction  
error, or system error  
The indicators will change with the  
status of the input signal, but input  
status will not be updated in memory.  
9. Output Indicators  
These indicators are lit when the corresponding output terminal is ON.  
10. Analog Controls  
Setting these controls sets the contents of IR 250 and IR 251 from 0 to 200.  
11. Peripheral Port  
Connects the PC to a Peripheral Device, RS-232C Adapter, or RS-422  
Adapter.  
12. Expansion I/O Unit Connector  
Connects the PCs CPU Unit to an Expansion I/O Unit to add another 12  
input points and 8 output points. Up to 3 Expansion I/O Units can be con-  
nected.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Unit Components  
Section 2-2  
2-2-2 Expansion I/O Unit Components  
Expansion I/O Unit with 20 I/O Terminals  
1. Input terminals  
3. Input indicators  
6. Expansion connector  
4. Output indicators  
2. Output terminals  
5. Expansion I/O Unit Connecting Cable  
Expansion I/O Unit with 8 Input Terminals  
1. Input terminals  
3. Input indicators  
6. Expansion connector  
1. Input terminals  
5. Expansion I/O Unit Connecting Cable  
Expansion I/O Unit with 8 Output Terminals  
2. Output terminals  
4. Output indicators  
6. Expansion connector  
2. Output terminals  
5. Expansion I/O Unit Connecting Cable  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Input Terminals  
Connects the Unit to external input devices.  
2. Output Terminals  
Connects the Unit to external output devices.  
3. Input Indicators  
The input indicators are lit when the corresponding input terminal is ON.  
4. Output Indicators  
The output indicators are lit when the corresponding output terminal is ON.  
5. Expansion I/O Unit Connecting Cable  
Connects the Expansion I/O Unit to the Expansion Connector on the PCs  
CPU Unit or another Expansion Unit.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Unit Components  
Section 2-2  
Caution Do not touch the Expansion I/O Unit Connecting Cable while the power is being  
!
supplied in order to prevent any malfunction due to static electricity.  
6. Expansion Connector  
Connects to another Expansion Unit (Expansion I/O Unit, Analog I/O Unit, or  
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit). Up to 3 Expansion Units can be connected to a  
CPU Unit.  
2-2-3 Analog I/O Unit Components  
3. Expansion connector  
1. Analog I/O terminals  
2. Expansion I/O Unit Connecting Cable  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Analog I/O Terminals  
Connects the Unit to analog input devices and analog output devices.  
2. Expansion I/O Unit Connecting Cable  
Connects the Analog I/O Unit to the Expansion Connector on the PCs CPU  
Unit or another Expansion Unit. The cable is connected to the Analog I/O  
Unit and cannot be removed.  
Caution Do not touch the Expansion I/O Unit Connecting Cable while the power is being  
!
supplied in order to prevent any malfunction due to static electricity.  
3. Expansion Connector  
Connects to another Expansion Unit (Expansion I/O Unit, Analog I/O Unit, or  
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit). Up to 3 Expansion Units can be connected to a  
CPU Unit.  
2-2-4 Temperature Sensor Unit Components  
3. Rotary switch  
5. Expansion connector  
1. Temperature input terminals  
4. Expansion I
1, 2, 3...  
1. Temperature Input Terminals  
Connect to a thermocouple or a platinum resistance thermometer.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Unit Components  
Section 2-2  
2. DIP Switch  
Sets the temperature unit (°C or °F), and the number of decimal places  
used.  
ON  
1
2
Number of decimal places used  
OFF: Normal (0 or 1); ON: 2  
Temperature unit  
OFF: °C; ON: °F  
3. Rotary Switch  
Sets the temperature range. Set the range in accordance with the specifica-  
tions of the temperature sensor used.  
CPM1A-TS001/002  
Set value  
Thermocouple  
Range (°C)  
200 to 1,300  
Range (°F)  
300 to 2,300  
K
J
0
1
0.0 to 500.0  
0.0 to 900.0  
100 to 1,500  
0.0 to 750.0  
2
100 to 850  
3
0.0 to 400.0  
4 to F  
---  
Setting not possible  
CPM1A-TS101/102  
Set value Platinum resistance  
thermometer  
Range (°C)  
Range (°F)  
0
Pt100  
JPt100  
---  
200.0 to 650.0  
200.0 to 650.0  
Setting not possible  
300.0 to 1,200.0  
1
300.0 to 1,200.0  
2 to F  
4. Expansion I/O Connecting Cable  
Connects the Temperature Sensor Unit to the expansion connector on the  
PCs CPU Unit, an Expansion I/O Unit, or another Expansion Unit. The cable  
is connected to the Temperature Sensor Unit and cannot be removed.  
Caution Do not touch the expansion I/O connecting cable while the power is being sup-  
!
plied in order to prevent any malfunction due to static electricity.  
5. Expansion Connector  
Connects to an additional Expansion I/O Unit or another Expansion Unit.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Unit Components  
Section 2-2  
2-2-5 CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit Components  
2. DIP switch  
3. LED indicators  
5. Expansion connector  
1. CompoBus/S terminals  
4. Expansion I/O Unit Connecting Cable  
1, 2, 3...  
1. CompoBus/S Terminals  
Include the CompoBus/S communications data high/low terminal, commu-  
nications power supply +/terminals, and NC terminals. Power is supplied  
to the Unit internally, so the power supply terminals can be used as relay  
terminals.  
2. DIP Switch  
The DIP switch sets the Units node address, sets the communications  
mode, and determines whether or not the outputs will be cleared in the event  
of a communications error.  
Pin(s)  
Function  
NODE ADDRESS  
1 to 4  
These pins set the Units node address using the DIP switch pins as  
(labeled binary digits. (1 = ON)  
1, 2, 4,  
ON  
0: 0000  
4: 0100  
8: 1000  
12: 1100  
1: 0001  
2: 0010  
6: 0110  
10: 1010  
14: 1110  
3: 0011  
7: 0111  
11: 1011  
15: 1111  
and 8)  
5: 0101  
9: 1001  
13: 1101  
SW1  
DR  
ON: Long-distance Communications Mode  
OFF:High-speed Communications Mode  
(See note.)  
HOLD  
ON: Retain outputs when a communications error occurs.  
OFF:Clear outputs when a communications error occurs.  
Note The Long-distance Communications Mode can be used only when connected to  
one of the following Master Units: C200HW-SRM21-V1, CQM1-SRM21-V1, or  
SRM1-C0j-V2.  
3. LED Indicators  
These indicators show the status of CompoBus/S communications.  
Indicator  
COMM  
Status  
ON  
Meaning  
Communications in progress.  
(yellow)  
OFF  
ON  
Communications error or stopped.  
A communications error has occurred.  
Indicates normal or no communications.  
ERR  
(red)  
OFF  
4. Expansion I/O Unit Connecting Cable  
Connects the CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit to the Expansion Connector on the  
PCs CPU Unit or another Expansion Unit.  
Caution Do not touch the Expansion I/O Unit Connecting Cable while the power is being  
!
supplied in order to prevent any malfunction due to static electricity.  
5. Expansion Connector  
Connects to another Expansion Unit (Expansion I/O Unit, Analog I/O Unit, or  
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit). Up to 3 Expansion Units can be connected to a  
CPU Unit.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Unit Components  
Section 2-2  
2-2-6 Communications Adapter Components  
RS-232C Adapter  
1. Mode Setting Switch  
3. RS-232C port  
RS-232C Port Pin Allocation  
FG  
SD  
RD  
1
6
7
8
9
DCD  
DSR  
DTR  
SG  
2
3
RTS 4  
CTS 5  
2. Connector  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Mode Setting Switch  
Set this switch to HOSTwhen using a Host Link system to connect to a  
personal computer. Set this switch to NTwhen connecting to a Program-  
mable Terminal or PC for 1:1 PC Link.  
2. Connector  
Connects to the CPU Units Peripheral Port.  
3. RS-232C Port  
Connects to the RS-232C cable from the other device such as a personal  
computer, Peripheral Device, or Programmable Terminal.  
RS-422 Adapter  
1. Termination Resistance Switch  
RS-422 Port Pin Allocation  
3. RS-422 port  
FG  
SG  
SDB  
SDA  
RDB  
RDA  
2. Connector  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Termination Resistance Switch  
Set the termination resistance switch to ON(upper side) for the Link  
Adapters on both ends of the Host Link system and for the RS-422 Adapter.  
2. Connector  
Connects to the CPU Units Peripheral Port.  
3. RS-422 Port  
Connects to the Host Link network.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECTION 3  
Installation and Wiring  
This section provides information on installing and wiring a CPM1A PC. Be sure to follow the directions and precautions in  
this section when installing the CPM1A in a panel or cabinet, wiring the power supply, or wiring I/O.  
3-1 Design Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-1-1 Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-1-2 Interlock and Limit Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-1-3 Power Supply Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-1-4 CPM1A Power Interruptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-2 Selecting an Installation Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-2-1 Installation Site Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-2-2 Panel/Cabinet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-3 Installing the CPM1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-3-1 CPM1A Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-3-2 CPM1A Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-3-3 Connecting an Expansion I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-4 Wiring and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-4-1 General Precautions for Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-4-2 Ground Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-4-3 Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-4-4 Input Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-4-5 Output Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-4-6 Peripheral Device Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-4-7 Host Link Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-4-8 One-to-one PC Link Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-4-9 One-to-one NT Link Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
3-4-10 CompoBus/S I/O Link Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
36  
36  
36  
36  
36  
37  
37  
38  
39  
39  
39  
41  
43  
43  
44  
45  
47  
52  
60  
60  
63  
64  
65  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Design Precautions  
Section 3-1  
3-1 Design Precautions  
Observe the following precautions when designing a system incorporating a  
CPM1A PC.  
3-1-1 Power Supply Wiring  
Separate the power supply wiring from the control system, CPM1A system, and  
DC I/O system wiring. Separate the control circuits that supply power to the main  
Unit from the main circuits using dedicated circuit protectors and fuses.  
3-1-2 Interlock and Limit Circuits  
WARNING Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety  
measures must be provided in external control circuits (i.e., not in the  
Programmable Controller) to ensure safety in the system if an abnormality  
occurs due to malfunction of the PC or another external factor affecting the PC  
operation. Not providing proper safety measures may result in serious  
accidents.  
!
Construct an external interlock circuit if CPM1A outputs are used to perform  
reciprocal operations such as controlling the forward and reverse operation of a  
motor or if incorrect PC operation could cause accidents or mechanical damage.  
Also, construct an external limit circuit to prevent run-away movement in sys-  
tems such as position control.  
The following diagram shows an example of an interlock circuit.  
Interlock Circuit  
MC2  
01005  
01006  
MC1  
MC2  
Motor forward  
Motor reverse  
CPM1A  
MC1  
In the interlock circuit above, MC1 and MC2 cant be ON at the same time even if  
CPM1A outputs 01005 and 01006 are both ON (an incorrect PC operation).  
3-1-3 Power Supply Voltage  
Caution Use the power supply voltages indicated in Section 2 Unit Specifications and  
!
Components. Failure to adhere to the specifications may result in fire. In places  
where power supply conditions are poor, take steps to ensure that power is sup-  
plied at the rated voltage. Be sure to adhere to safety precautions, such as pro-  
viding breakers to prevent short circuits in external wiring. When conducting any  
of the following operations, turn OFF the power to the PC. Electric shock, prod-  
uct damage and malfunction may result.  
Connecting or disconnecting Expansion I/O Units and CPU Units.  
Assembling Units  
Connecting cables and wiring.  
3-1-4 CPM1A Power Interruptions  
Supply Voltage Drop  
When the supply voltage falls below 85% of the rated value, the PC will stop and  
the outputs will go OFF.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting an Installation Site  
Section 3-2  
Momentary Power Failure Detection  
A momentary power failure lasting less than 10 ms with an AC power supply and  
2 ms with a DC power supply is not detected and the CPU Unit continues to oper-  
ate.  
A momentary power failure lasting longer than 10 ms with an AC power supply  
and 2 ms with a DC power supply may or may not be detected in an uncertain  
area.  
When a momentary power failure is detected, the CPU Unit stops operating and  
the output goes OFF.  
Automatic Restart  
When the supply voltage recovers to a value higher than 85% of the rated value,  
operations resumes automatically.  
Under  
Over  
10 ms (2 ms)  
Duration of power interrupt  
(Below 85% of rated voltage)  
Normal operation  
Operation may stop.  
All outputs go OFF when  
operations stop.  
Note The CPM1A may repeat stop/start operations if the supply voltage of less than  
85% of the rated value gradually goes up or down.  
If this affects the equipment, etc., provide a protection circuit which shuts off the  
output if the supply voltage is not above the rated value.  
Time Up to the Start of Operation  
The time from when the power supply is turned on to when the operation starts  
varies depending on the operation conditions such as power supply voltage,  
configuration, ambient temperature, etc. The minimum time is approximately  
300 ms.  
3-2 Selecting an Installation Site  
The CPM1A is resistant to harsh conditions and highly reliable, but installing the  
PC in a favorable site will maximize its reliability and operating lifetime.  
Caution Be sure to install the CPM1A correctly, as outlined in this manual. Failure to do so  
!
may result in Unit malfunction.  
3-2-1 Installation Site Conditions  
Note Do not install the CPM1A under any of the following conditions.  
Locations subject to direct sunlight.  
Locations subject to a temperature below 0°C or over 55°C.  
Locations subject to a humidity below 10% or over 90%.  
Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tempera-  
ture.  
Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.  
Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.  
Locations subject to shock or vibration.  
Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.  
Be sure that the conditions at the installation site conform to the CPM1As gen-  
eral specifications. Refer to 2-1-1 General Specifications for details.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting an Installation Site  
Section 3-2  
Note Provide proper shielding when installing in the following locations:  
Locations subject to static electricity or other sources of noise.  
Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.  
Locations subject to possible exposure to radiation.  
Locations near to power supply lines.  
3-2-2 Panel/Cabinet Installation  
Consider PC operation, maintenance, and surrounding conditions when instal-  
ling the CPM1A in a panel or cabinet.  
Overheating  
The operating temperature range for the CPM1A is 0_ C to 55_ C. Be sure that  
there is adequate ventilation for cooling.  
Allow enough space for air circulation.  
Do not install the CPM1A above equipment that generates a large amount of  
heat, such as heaters, transformers, or large resistors.  
Install a cooling fan or system when the ambient temperature exceeds 55_ C.  
CPM1A  
Air vent  
Electrical Noise  
Power lines and high-voltage equipment can cause electrical noise in the PC.  
Do not install the CPM1A in a panel or cabinet with high-voltage equipment.  
Allow at least 200 mm between the CPM1A and nearby power lines.  
200 mm min.  
CPM1A  
200 mm min.  
Accessibility  
Ensure that the CPM1A can be accessed for normal operation and mainte-  
nance.  
Provide a clear path to the CPM1A for operation and maintenance. High-volt-  
age equipment or power lines could be dangerous if they are in the way during  
routine operations.  
The PC will be easiest to access if the panel or cabinet is installed about 3 to 5  
feet off of the floor.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the CPM1A  
Section 3-3  
3-3 Installing the CPM1A  
3-3-1 CPM1A Orientation  
The CPM1A must be installed in the position shown below to ensure adequate  
cooling.  
Correct  
Do not install the CPM1A in either of the following positions.  
Incorrect  
Incorrect  
3-3-2 CPM1A Installation  
The CPM1A can be installed on a horizontal surface or on a DIN track.  
Surface Installation  
Use the following pattern when installing a CPM1A on a horizontal surface.  
CPM1A-10CDR-j /10CDT-D/10CDT1-D and  
CPM1A-20CDR-j /20CDT-D/20CDT1-D  
Two, M4 holes  
100 mm  
CPU Unit  
A
8 mm  
Use M4 dia. x 15 screws.  
The width (A) between the mounting holes depends on the CPM1A model.  
Model number  
Width (A)  
CPM1A-10CDR-j /10CDT-D/10CDT1-D CPU Unit  
CPM1A-20CDR-j /20CDT-D/20CDT1-D CPU Unit  
56 mm  
76 mm  
Allow 10 to 15 mm between the Units when installing a Communications Adapter  
next to the CPU Unit, as shown below.  
21 mm  
81 mm  
100 mm  
CPU Unit  
Communications  
Adapter  
10 to  
15 mm  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the CPM1A  
Section 3-3  
CPM1A-30CDR-j /30CDT-D/30CDT1-D and  
CPM1A-40CDR-j /40CDT-D/40CDT1-D  
Four, M4 holes  
100 mm  
CPU Unit  
A
8 mm  
Use M4 dia. x 15 screws.  
The width (A) between the mounting holes depends on the CPM1A model.  
Model number  
Width (A)  
120 mm  
CPM1A-30CDR-j /30CDT-D/30CDT1-D CPU Unit  
CPM1A-40CDR-j /40CDT-D/40CDT1-D CPU Unit  
140 mm  
76 mm  
56 mm  
56 mm  
56 mm  
21 mm  
21 mm  
76 mm  
Expansion I/O Unit  
CPM1A-20ED  
CPM1A-8E  
j
j
Analog I/O Unit  
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit  
RS-232C Adapter  
RS-422 Adapter  
Temperature Sensor Unit  
Allow 10 to 15 mm between the Units when installing an Expansion Unit, Expan-  
sion I/O Unit, or Communications Adapter next to the CPU Unit, as shown below.  
21 mm  
81 mm  
CPU Unit  
100 mm  
Expansion Unit or  
Expansion I/O Unit  
A
Communications  
Adapter  
10 to  
15 mm  
10 to  
15 mm  
DIN Track Installation  
The CPM1A can be installed on a 35-mm DIN Track.  
DIN Track  
PFP-100N (1 m)  
PFP-50N (50 cm)  
PFP-100N2 (1 m)  
End Plates  
(PFP-M)  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the CPM1A  
Section 3-3  
Installation  
Lower the CPM1A so that the notch on the back of the PC catches the top of the  
DIN Track. Push the PC forward until the lock snaps into place.  
Removal  
Pry the lock down with a standard screwdriver and pivot the PC upward to  
remove it.  
Screwdriver  
3-3-3 Connecting an Expansion I/O Unit  
Up to 3 Expansion I/O Units can be connected to the CPM1A-30CDR-j/  
30CDT-D/30CDT1-D and CPM1A-40CDR-j/40CDT-D/40CDT1-D CPU Units.  
Use the following procedure when connecting an Expansion I/O Unit.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Remove the cover from the CPU Units or the Expansion I/O Units Expan-  
sion I/O Unit Connector. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to remove the cover  
from the Expansion I/O Connector.  
Expansion I/O Unit  
connector cover  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the CPM1A  
Section 3-3  
2. Insert the Expansion I/O Units Connecting Cable into the CPU Units or the  
Expansion I/O Units Expansion I/O Unit Connector.  
3. Replace the cover on the CPU Units or the Expansion I/O Units Expansion  
I/O Unit Connector.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring and Connections  
Section 3-4  
3-4 Wiring and Connections  
This section provides basic information on wiring the Power Supply Unit and  
Expansion I/O Units, and on connecting Peripheral Devices.  
3-4-1 General Precautions for Wiring  
Caution Attach the dustproof label provided before wiring. If scraps of wire get inside the  
Unit, malfunction will result. After completing wiring be sure to remove the label  
to avoid overheating.  
!
Dustproof label  
I/O Line Noise  
Do not run CPM1A I/O lines in the same duct or conduit as power lines.  
Hanging Ducts  
Leave at least 300 mm between the power cables and the I/O or control wiring,  
as shown in the following diagram.  
CPM1A I/O lines  
300 mm min.  
Control cables and  
CPM1A power lines  
300 mm min.  
Power cables  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring and Connections  
Section 3-4  
Floor Ducts  
Leave at least 200 mm between the wiring and the top of the duct, as shown in  
the following diagram.  
Control cables and  
CPM1A power lines  
Metal plate (iron)  
CPM1A I/O lines  
Power cables  
200 mm min.  
Conduits  
Separate the CPM1A I/O lines, power and control lines, and power cables, as  
shown in the following diagram.  
Control cables and  
CPM1A I/O lines CPM1A power linesPower cables  
3-4-2 Ground Wiring  
Grounding  
Be sure to ground the earth terminal to less than 100 in order to protect against  
electric shock and incorrect operation from electrical noise. Be sure to use a wire  
2
of at least 1.25 mm for grounding.  
WARNING During installation, be sure to ground to 100 max in order to protect against  
!
electric shock.  
Ground to 100 max.  
AC power supply unit  
L1  
L2/N  
01  
COM  
100 to 240 VAC  
00  
0 CH  
02  
Ground to 100 max.  
DC power supply unit  
+
COM  
01  
24 VDC  
NC  
00  
02  
0 CH  
Note The NC terminal is not used.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring and Connections  
Section 3-4  
Caution Disconnect the functional earth terminal when performing withstand voltage  
!
tests. Not disconnecting the functional earth terminal may result in burning.  
Crimp Connectors  
!
Caution Always use crimp connectors for the CPM1As power lines and I/O lines or else  
use a solid wire (instead of a stranded wire). Do not connect bare stranded wires  
directly to terminals. Bare stranded wires connected directly to the terminal can  
cause a fire.  
Use M3 terminal screws and tighten the screws securely (0.5 N S m).  
Fork terminal  
Ring terminal  
6.2 mm max.  
6.2 mm max.  
The recommended wire size for solid wires is 0.4 to 1.2 mm (AWG26 to AWG18).  
3-4-3 Power Supply Wiring  
100- to 240-VAC Power  
Supply  
Wire a separate circuit for the CPM1As power supply circuit so that there isnt a  
voltage drop from the inrush current that flows when other equipment is turned  
on.  
When several CPM1A PCs are being used, it is recommended to wire the PCs  
on separate circuits to prevent a voltage drop from the inrush current or incorrect  
operation of the circuit breaker.  
Use twisted power supply wires to prevent noise from the power supply lines.  
Adding a 1:1 isolating transformer reduces electrical noise even further.  
Considering the possibility of voltage drops and the allowable current, be sure to  
use thick power lines.  
Twist the wires. The cross-sectional area  
2
of each wire must be 1.25 mm min.  
Isolating  
transformer  
AC  
Breaker  
power  
supply  
COM  
00  
0 CH  
01  
L1  
L2/N  
100 to  
240 VAC  
02  
Note 1. Before connecting the power supply, make sure that the CPU Unit requires  
an AC power supply and not a DC power supply. The CPU Units internal  
circuitry will be damaged if AC power is mistakenly supplied to a CPU Unit  
that requires a DC power supply.  
2. The power supply input terminals are at the top of the CPU Unit; the termi-  
nals at the bottom of the CPU Unit output 24-VDC power for external de-  
vices. The CPU Units internal circuitry will be damaged if AC power is mis-  
takenly supplied to a CPU Units power supply output terminals.  
Crimp Connectors  
Caution Always use crimp connectors for the CPM1As power lines. Do not connect bare  
stranded wires directly to terminals. Bare stranded wires connected directly to  
the terminal can cause a fire.  
!
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring and Connections  
Section 3-4  
Use M3 terminal screws.  
Connect a crimp connector with a ring terminal to each terminal screw.  
Ring terminal  
6.2 mm max.  
Caution Tighten the terminal block screws of the AC Power Supply to the torque of  
!
0.5 N S m. Loose screws may result in burning or malfunction.  
24-VDC Power Supply  
Use a DC power supply with sufficient capacity and low ripple. For a DC power  
supply used for the transistor output, use a power supply with double insulation  
or reinforced insulation to conform to the EC Directives (Low-voltage Direc-  
tives). The NC terminal is not used.  
24 VDC  
COM  
01  
+
24 VDC  
00  
0 CH  
02  
NC  
Caution Do not perform a withstand voltage test on a CPU Unit with a DC power supply.  
!
The test might damage the PCs internal components.  
Note 1. Do not conduct a withstand voltage test for the power supply section of the  
CPU Unit with a DC power supply. Doing so may damage internal elements.  
2. Reinforced insulation or double insulation must be used for a DC power sup-  
ply to conform to the EC Directives (Low Voltage Directive).  
Crimp Connectors  
!
Caution Always use crimp connectors for the CPM1As power lines and I/O lines or else  
use a solid wire (instead of a stranded wire). Do not connect bare stranded wires  
directly to terminals. Bare stranded wires connected directly to the terminal can  
cause a fire.  
Use M3 terminal screws and tighten the screws securely (0.5 N S m).  
Fork terminal  
Ring terminal  
6.2 mm max.  
6.2 mm max.  
The recommended wire size for solid wires is 0.4 to 1.2 mm (AWG26 to AWG18).  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring and Connections  
Section 3-4  
3-4-4 Input Wiring  
Wire the inputs to the CPM1As CPU Unit and Expansion I/O Unit as shown in the  
following diagrams. Use crimp connectors or solid wire (not stranded wire) to  
connect to the PC. Do not apply voltages exceeding the rated input voltage to the  
input terminals. The power supply output terminals can be used with AC-type  
CPU Units.  
Input Configuration  
The following diagrams show the input configurations.  
CPM1A-10CDR-j/10CDT-D/10CDT1-D  
+10%  
24 VDC  
/
Input devices  
15%  
COM  
01  
03  
05  
02  
04  
00  
0 CH  
CPM1A-20CDR-j/20CDT-D/20CDT1-D  
+10%  
Input devices  
24 VDC  
/
15%  
COM  
01  
03  
05  
07  
09  
11  
02  
04  
06  
08  
10  
00  
0 CH  
CPM1A-30CDR-j/30CDT-D/30CDT1-D  
Input devices  
+10%  
24 VDC  
/
15%  
COM  
01  
03  
05  
07  
09  
11  
01  
03  
05  
02  
04  
06  
08  
10  
02  
04  
00  
0 CH  
00  
1 CH  
CPM1A-40CDR-j/40CDT-D/40CDT1-D  
+10%  
24 VDC  
/
15%  
Input devices  
COM  
01  
03  
05  
07  
09  
11  
01  
03  
05  
07  
09  
11  
02  
04  
06  
08  
10  
02  
04  
06  
08  
10  
00  
0 CH  
00  
1 CH  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring and Connections  
Section 3-4  
CPM1A-8ED  
Input  
devices  
24 VDC  
COM  
01  
03  
07  
00  
02  
06  
04  
COM  
05  
Input  
devices  
Note Although the COM terminals are internally connected, be sure to wire them ex-  
ternally as well.  
CPM1A-20EDR/20EDR1/EDT/EDT1  
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Input devices  
24 VDC  
COM  
01  
03  
05  
07  
09  
11  
NC  
00  
j CH  
02  
04  
06  
08  
10  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring and Connections  
Section 3-4  
Input Wiring Example  
An AC-type CPU Unit is shown. DC-type CPU Units dont have power supply  
outputs.  
Input devices  
COM  
COM  
01  
03  
05  
07  
09  
11  
01  
03  
05  
02  
04  
06  
08  
10  
02  
04  
00  
0 CH  
00  
1 CH  
10 CH  
00  
11 CH  
00  
+
01  
02  
04  
05  
07  
02  
24 VDC at  
0.2 A output  
COM  
COM  
COM  
03  
COM  
06  
COM  
03  
01  
External power supply:  
24 VDC at 200 mA/10-point and 20-point I/O type CPU Units  
24 VDC at 300 mA/30-point and 40-point I/O type CPU Units  
(Applicable to CPU Units with a power supply of 100 to 240 VAC.)  
WARNING When the 24-VDC output (service power supply to the PC) is overloaded or  
short-circuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs being turned OFF.  
External safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system. Not  
providing proper safety measures may result in serious accidents.  
!
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring and Connections  
Section 3-4  
Input Devices  
The following table shows how to connect various input devices.  
Device  
Circuit diagram  
Relay output  
Relay  
IN  
5 mA/12 mA  
CPM1A  
COM (+)  
NPN open collector  
NPN current output  
Sensor  
+
Sensor power  
supply  
Output  
IN  
CPM1A  
5 mA/12 mA  
0 V  
COM (+)  
Use the same power supply for  
the input and sensor.  
Constant current  
circuit  
+
Output  
IN  
CPM1A  
CPM1A  
5 mA/12 mA  
0 V  
+
COM (+)  
PNP current output  
+
Sensor power  
supply  
5 mA/12 mA  
IN  
Output  
0 V  
COM ()  
Voltage output  
+
COM (+)  
IN  
CPM1A  
Output  
0 V  
Sensor power  
supply  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring and Connections  
Section 3-4  
Leakage Current (24 VDC)  
A leakage current can cause false inputs when using 2-wire sensors (proximity  
switches or photoelectric switches) or limit switches with LEDs.  
False inputs wont occur if the leakage current is less than 1.0 mA (2.5 mA for  
IN00000 to IN00002), but if the leakage current exceeds these values, insert a  
bleeder resistor in the circuit to reduce the input impedance, as shown in the fol-  
lowing diagram.  
Input power  
supply  
CPM1A  
R
Bleeder resistor  
2-wire sensor, etc.  
I: Devices leakage current (mA)  
R: Bleeder resistance (k)  
L : CPM1As input impedance (k)  
C
C
I : CPM1As input current (mA)  
W: Bleeder resistors power rating (W)  
E : CPM1As OFF voltage (V) = 5.0 V  
C
LC   5.0  
2.3  
R
R +  
kW max.  
W +  
W min.  
I   LC5.0  
The equations above were derived from the following equations:  
Input voltage (24)  
R   
Input Current (IC)  
I   
x OFF voltage (EC : 5.0)  
Input voltage (24)  
Input Current (IC)  
R )  
Input voltage (24)  
R
W y  
  Input voltage (24)   tolerance (4)  
Refer to 2-1-3 I/O Specifications for details on the values L , I , and E .  
C
C
C
The input impedance, input current, and OFF voltage may vary depending on the  
input being used. (IN00000 through IN00002 have different values.)  
Inductive Loads  
When connecting an inductive load to an input, connect a diode in parallel with  
the load. The diode should satisfy the following requirements:  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Peak reverse-breakdown voltage must be at least 3 times the load voltage.  
2. Average rectified current must be 1 A.  
IN  
Diode  
CPM1A  
COM  
Crimp Connectors  
!
Caution Always use crimp connectors for the CPM1As power lines and I/O lines or else  
use a solid wire (instead of a stranded wire). Do not connect bare stranded wires  
directly to terminals. Bare stranded wires connected directly to the terminal can  
cause a fire.  
Use M3 terminal screws and tighten the screws securely (0.5 N S m).  
Fork terminal  
Ring terminal  
6.2 mm max.  
6.2 mm max.  
The recommended wire size for solid wires is 0.4 to 1.2 mm (AWG26 to AWG18).  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring and Connections  
Section 3-4  
3-4-5 Output Wiring  
Relay Output Wiring  
Wire the outputs to the CPM1As CPU Unit and Expansion I/O Unit as shown in  
the following diagrams. Use crimp connectors or solid wire (not stranded wire) to  
connect to the PC. The power supply output terminals can be used with AC-type  
CPU Units.  
Always use solid wire or attach crimp connectors if a stranded wire is used.  
Do not connect loads or apply voltages exceeding the maximum switching ca-  
pacity to the output terminals.  
Dont exceed the output capacity or the maximum common current. Refer to  
2-1-3 I/O Specifications for details.  
Each common terminal is separated from one another for each group of output  
terminals.  
Item  
Specification  
2 A (250 VAC or 24 VDC)  
4 A/common  
Output capacity  
Max. common capacity  
WARNING The PC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of the  
output relays or destruction of the output transistors. External safety measures  
must be provided to ensure safety in the system. Not providing proper safety  
measures may result in serious accidents.  
!
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring and Connections  
Section 3-4  
Output Configurations  
10 CH  
00  
01  
02  
CPM1A-10CDR-  
j
COM  
COM COM  
03  
Common  
10 CH  
00  
CPM1A-20CDR-j/CPM1A-20EDR/20EDR1  
01  
COM COM  
02  
04  
05  
07  
COM  
03  
COM  
06  
Common  
Common  
10 CH  
00  
11 CH  
00  
CPM1A-30CDR-  
j
01  
02  
04  
05  
07  
02  
COM  
COM COM  
03  
COM  
06  
COM  
01  
03  
Common  
Common  
Common  
CPM1A-40CDR-  
j
10 CH  
00  
11 CH  
00  
COM  
01  
02  
04  
05  
COM  
07  
02  
04  
05  
COM 06  
07  
COM  
COM COM  
03  
06  
01  
03  
Common  
Common  
Common  
Common  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring and Connections  
Section 3-4  
CPM1A-8ER  
250 VAC/  
24 VDC  
COM  
01  
03  
00  
04  
02  
06  
COM  
05  
07  
250 VAC/  
24 VDC  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring and Connections  
Section 3-4  
Transistor Output Wiring (Sink Type)  
Wire the outputs to the CPM1As CPU Unit and Expansion I/O Unit as shown in  
the following diagrams.  
Always use solid wire or attach crimp connectors if a stranded wire is used.  
Dont exceed the output capacity or the maximum common current. Refer to  
2-1-3 I/O Specifications for details.  
Item  
Specification  
300 mA (24 VDC)  
0.9 A/common  
Output capacity  
Max. common capacity  
Output Configurations  
10 CH  
00  
01  
02  
CPM1A-10CDT-D  
COM  
COM COM  
03  
+10%  
24 VDC  
/
15%  
Common  
10 CH  
00  
CPM1A-20CDT-D/CPM1A-20EDT  
01  
02  
04  
05  
07  
COM  
COM COM  
03  
COM  
06  
+10%  
24 VDC  
/
15%  
Common Common  
CPM1A-30CDT-D  
10 CH  
00  
11 CH  
00  
01  
02  
04  
05  
COM  
07  
02  
COM  
COM COM  
03  
06  
COM  
01  
03  
+10%  
24 VDC  
/
15%  
Common  
Common  
Common  
CPM1A-40CDT-D  
10 CH  
00  
11 CH  
00  
01  
02  
04  
05  
COM  
07  
02  
04  
05  
07  
COM  
COM COM  
03  
06  
COM  
01  
03  
COM  
06  
+10%  
24 VDC  
/
15%  
Common  
Common  
Common  
Common  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring and Connections  
Section 3-4  
CPM1A-8ET  
+10%  
24 VDC  
/
15%  
COM  
COM  
01  
05  
03  
07  
00  
04  
02  
06  
+10%  
24 VDC  
/
15%  
Caution Double-check the polarity of the power supply for the load before turning it on.  
!
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring and Connections  
Section 3-4  
Transistor Output Wiring (Source Type)  
Wire the outputs to the CPM1As CPU Unit and Expansion I/O Unit as shown in  
the following diagrams.  
Always use solid wire or attach crimp connectors if a stranded wire is used.  
Dont exceed the output capacity or the maximum common current. Refer to  
2-1-3 I/O Specifications for details.  
Item  
Specification  
300 mA (24 VDC)  
0.9 A/common  
Output capacity  
Max. common capacity  
Output Configurations  
10 CH  
00  
01  
02  
CPM1A-10CDT1-D  
COM  
COM COM  
03  
+10%  
24 VDC  
/
15%  
Common  
CPM1A-20CDT1-D/CPM1A-20EDT1  
10 CH  
00  
01  
02  
04  
05  
07  
COM  
COM COM  
03  
COM  
06  
+10%  
24 VDC  
/
15%  
Common  
Common  
CPM1A-30CDT1-D  
10 CH  
00  
11 CH  
00  
COM  
01  
02  
04  
05  
COM  
07  
02  
COM  
COM COM  
03  
06  
01  
03  
+10%  
24 VDC  
/
15%  
CPM1A-40CDT1-D  
Common Common  
Common  
10 CH  
00  
11 CH  
00  
01  
02  
04  
05  
COM  
07  
02  
04  
05  
COM 06  
07  
COM  
COM COM  
03  
06  
COM  
01  
03  
+10%  
24 VDC  
/
15%  
Common  
Common  
Common  
Common  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring and Connections  
Section 3-4  
CPM1A-8ET1  
+10%  
24 VDC  
/
15%  
COM  
COM  
01  
05  
03  
07  
00  
04  
02  
06  
+10%  
24 VDC  
/
15%  
Caution Double-check the polarity of the power supply for the load before turning it on.  
!
Output Wiring Precautions  
Observe the following precautions to protect the PCs internal components.  
Output Short Protection  
The output or internal circuitry might be damaged when the load connected to an  
output is short-circuited, so it is recommended to install a protective fuse (0.5 to  
1.0 A) in each output circuit.  
Polarity of Power Supply for the Load  
Double-check the polarity of the DC power supply for the load before wiring the  
transistor output. If the polarity of the power supply is reversely connected, the  
load will malfunction and internal components may be damaged.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring and Connections  
Section 3-4  
Inductive Loads  
When connecting an inductive load to an input, connect a surge protector or  
diode in parallel with the load.  
The surge protectors components should have the following ratings:  
Relay Output  
OUT  
CPM1A  
Surge protector  
COM  
Relay Output  
Transistor Output  
(Sink Type)  
OUT  
CPM1A  
Diode  
COM  
Relay Output  
Transistor Output  
(Source Type)  
OUT  
CPM1A  
Diode  
COM  
The diode should satisfy the following requirements:  
Peak reverse-breakdown voltage must be at least 3 times the load voltage.  
Average rectified current must be 1 A.  
Inrush Current Considerations  
When switching a load with a high inrush current in the CPM1A relay output or  
transistor output model, such as an incandescent lamp, suppress the inrush cur-  
rent as shown below.  
Countermeasure 1  
Countermeasure 2  
R
OUT  
R
OUT  
COM  
COM  
Providing a dark current of  
approx. one-third of the rated  
value through an incandescent  
lamp  
Providing a limiting resistor  
Fuse Insertion  
The CPM1A with transistor output may burn if the load is short-circuited, there-  
fore, insert a protective fuse in series to the load.  
Crimp Connectors  
Caution Always use crimp connectors for the CPM1As power lines and I/O lines or else  
use a solid wire (instead of a stranded wire). Do not connect bare stranded wires  
directly to terminals. Bare stranded wires connected directly to the terminal can  
cause a fire.  
!
Use M3 terminal screws and tighten the screws securely (0.5 N S m).  
Fork terminal  
Ring terminal  
6.2 mm max.  
6.2 mm max.  
The recommended wire size for solid wires is 0.4 to 1.2 mm (AWG26 to AWG18).  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring and Connections  
Section 3-4  
3-4-6 Peripheral Device Connection  
The CPM1A CPU Unit can be connected to a C200H-PRO27-E Programming  
Console with a standard C200H-CN222 (2 m) or C200H-CN422 (4 m) Connect-  
ing Cable. The CPM1A CPU Unit can be also connected to a CQM1-PRO01-E.  
The CQM1-PRO01-E is provided with a 2-m Connecting Cable.  
3-4-7 Host Link Connections  
Host Link is a command/response communications system in which commands  
are transmitted from the host computer and corresponding responses are  
returned from the destination PCs. Host Link commands can be used to read/  
write data in PC data areas and read/write PC settings.  
One-to-one Host Link  
Connection  
The CPM1A CPU Unit can be connected to an IBM PC/AT compatible computer  
or a Programmable Terminal with an RS-232C Adapter, as shown in the follow-  
ing diagram.  
OMRON PT  
RS-232C  
Adapter  
RS-232C  
Adapter  
CPM1A CPU Unit  
CPM1A CPU Unit  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring and Connections  
Section 3-4  
The following diagram shows the wiring in the RS-232C cable used to connect a  
CPM1A to a host computer or Programmable Terminal.  
IBM PC/AT compatible computer  
or Programmable Terminal (9-pin)  
RS-232C Adapter  
Signal  
CD  
RD  
SD  
ER  
SG  
DR  
RS  
CS  
CI  
Pin No.  
Pin No.  
Signal  
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1/Cover  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SG  
The type of connector used will vary depending on the PT. Check the PT manual  
to ensure the correct connector is used.  
Note When the CPM1A is connected to a host computer or OMRON PT, set the  
RS-232C Adapters mode setting switch to HOST.”  
One-to-N Host Link  
Connection  
Up to 32 CPU Units can be connected to an IBM PC/AT compatible computer or  
a Programmable Terminal with a 3G2A9-AL004-E Link Adapter and RS-422  
Adapters, as shown in the following diagram.  
RS-232C cable  
Link Adapter  
3G2A9-AL004-E  
RS-422 cable  
RS-422  
Adapter  
RS-422  
Adapter  
RS-422  
Adapter  
CPM1A  
CPM1A  
CPM1A  
CPU Unit  
CPU Unit  
CPU Unit  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring and Connections  
Section 3-4  
The following diagram shows the wiring in the RS-422 cables used to connect  
CPM1A PCs to a 3G2A9-AL004-E Link Adapter. In both the Link Adapter/  
RS-422 Adapter connections and the RS-422 Adapter/RS-422 Adapter connec-  
tions, connect the SG, RDA, RDB, SDA, and SDB terminals to the same termi-  
nals in the other Adapter.  
3G2A9-AL004-E Link Adapter  
9-pin D-sub Connector  
Pin no.  
Signal  
RDB  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SG  
25-pin D-sub Connector  
SDB  
RDA  
FG  
Use a straight RS-232C  
cable to connect to the  
host computers  
SDA  
RS-422 Adapter  
CPM1A CPU Unit  
RS-232C port.  
SG  
RDA  
RDB  
SDA  
SDB  
Note 1. The maximum length of the RS-422 cable should be 500 m.  
2. Set the termination resistance switch to ON(upper side) for Adapters on  
both ends of the Host Link system.  
Always use crimp connectors when wiring the RS-422 Adapters. Use M3 termi-  
nal screws and tighten the screws securely to the torque of 0.5 N S m.  
Fork terminal  
Ring terminal  
6.2 mm m
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring and Connections  
Section 3-4  
3-4-8 One-to-one PC Link Connections  
A CPM1A can be linked to a CPM1A, CQM1, CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C,  
SRM1(-V2), C200HS or C200HX/HG/HE PC through an RS-232C Adapter. One  
PC acts as the Master and the other as the Slave to link up to 256 bits in the LR  
area (LR 0000 to LR 1515).  
RS-232C Cable  
RS-232C Adapter  
(see note)  
RS-232C Adapter  
(see note)  
CPM1A CPU Unit  
CPM1A CPU Unit  
Link bits  
Link bits  
LR 00  
LR 00  
WRITE  
READ  
WRITE area  
READ area  
LR 07  
LR 08  
LR 07  
LR 08  
READ area  
WRITE area  
READ  
WRITE  
LR 15  
LR 15  
Note One-to-one PC connections can only be used when the RS-232C Adapter  
(CPM1-CIF01) is connected.  
Set the DIP switch of the RS-232C Adapter (CPM1-CIF01) to the NT (bottom)  
side.  
The following diagram shows the wiring in the RS-232C cable used to connect a  
CPM1A to another PC.  
RS-232C Adapter  
RS-232C Adapter  
Signal  
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
Pin No.  
Pin No.  
Signal  
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
1/Cover  
1/Cover  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SG  
SG  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring and Connections  
Section 3-4  
3-4-9 One-to-one NT Link Connections  
High-speed communications can be achieved by providing a direct access  
through the use of the 1:1 NT Link between the CPM1A and Programmable Ter-  
minal.  
OMRON Programmable Terminal  
CPM1A CPU Unit  
RS-232C Cable  
RS-232C  
Adapter  
Note The 1:1 NT Link can only be used when the RS-232C Adapter (CPM1-CIF01) is  
connected.  
Set the DIP switch of the RS-232C Adapter (CPM1-CIF01) to the NT (bottom)  
side.  
The following diagram shows the wiring in the RS-232C cable used to connect a  
CPM1A to a Programmable Terminal.  
PT  
RS-232C Adapter  
Signal  
Pin No.  
Pin No.  
Signal  
FG  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1/Cover  
SD  
RD  
RS  
CS  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SG  
SG  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wiring and Connections  
Section 3-4  
3-4-10 CompoBus/S I/O Link Connections  
A CompoBus/S I/O Link can be used to create an I/O link (remote I/O) of 8 input  
points and 8 output points with a CompoBus/S Master Unit or SRM1 PC. The  
connection is made through a CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit.  
From the standpoint of the CPM1A CPU Unit, the area allocated to the Compo-  
Bus/S I/O Link Unit can be treated just like the area allocated to an Expansion I/O  
Unit. The difference is that the bits are not actual I/O points, but I/O bits in the  
Master Unit.  
CompoBus/S Master Unit (or SRM1 PC)  
C200HX/HG/HE PC  
CPM1A CPU Unit  
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit  
(Slave)  
Cables  
Use special flat cable or VCTF cable to connect the nodes in the CompoBus/S  
I/O Link. (Special flat cables and VCTF cables cannot be combined in the same  
system.)  
Name  
Flat cable  
Specifications  
2
4-core flat cable, 0.75 mm  
2
VCTF cable  
2-core x 0.75 mm  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECTION 4  
Using Peripheral Devices  
This section outlines the operations possible with the SYSMAC Support Software (SSS) and the Programming Consoles.  
Actual SSS operating procedures are provided in the SSS Operation Manuals: Basics and C-series PCs. Programming Con-  
sole connection and operating procedures are provided in this section.  
4-1 Support Software Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-1-1 SSS System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-1-2 CPM1A Restrictions and Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-1-3 Offline Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-1-4 Online Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-1-5 Offline and Online Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-2 Using a Programming Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-2-1 Compatible Programming Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-2-2 Changing the CPM1As Mode with the Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-2-3 Connecting the Programming Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-2-4 Preparation for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-2-5 Entering the Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3 Programming Console Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-2 Clearing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-3 Reading/Clearing Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-4 Buzzer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-5 Setting and Reading a Program Memory Address and Monitoring I/O Bit Status  
4-3-6 Entering or Editing Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-7 Instruction Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-8 Bit Operand Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-9 Inserting and Deleting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-10 Checking the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-11 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-12 Differentiation Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-13 Binary Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-14 Three-word Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-15 Signed Decimal Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-16 Unsigned Decimal Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-17 Three-word Data Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-18 Changing Timer, Counter SV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-19 Hexadecimal, BCD Data Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-20 Binary Data Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-21 Signed Decimal Data Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-22 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-23 Force Set, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-24 Clear Force Set/Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-25 Hex-ASCII Display Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-3-26 Displaying the Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-4 Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-4-1 Preparatory Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-4-2 Example Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-4-3 Programming Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-4-4 Checking the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4-4-5 Test Run in MONITOR Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
68  
68  
68  
69  
72  
73  
74  
74  
76  
77  
78  
78  
80  
80  
81  
82  
82  
83  
84  
87  
87  
88  
89  
90  
92  
92  
93  
94  
94  
95  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
99  
100  
100  
101  
101  
101  
103  
104  
107  
107  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Support Software Capabilities  
Section 4-1  
4-1 Support Software Capabilities  
The SSS is a complete programming and control package designed for C-series  
and CVM1 PCs. It provides not only programming capabilities, but also  
advanced debugging, monitoring, and program/data management. The follow-  
ing tables provide only a brief introduction to the capabilities of the SSS. For fur-  
ther information and actual operating procedures, please refer to the SYSMAC  
Support Software Operation Manuals: Basics and C-series.  
CPM1A programming can be performed with any version of the SSS.  
In addition, the SYSMAC-CPT can be used for programming the CPM1A. Refer  
to the SYSMAC-CPT Support Software Quick Start Guide (W332) and User  
Manual (W333) for operation procedures. When programming the CPM1A  
using the SYSMAC-CPT, be sure to set the PC modelon the Support Software  
to CPM1 (CPM1A).”  
Operations for the WS02-CXPC1-E CX-Programmer are provided in the  
WS02-CXPC1-E CX-Programmer User Manual (W361) and the CX-Server  
User Manual (W362).  
4-1-1 SSS System Setup  
Set the PC Model to CQM1and the PC Interface to PERIPHERAL.Follow the  
directions in the SSS operating manuals for other System Setup settings.  
PC Model  
If the CPM1A PC doesnt appear as an option in the SSSs System Setup, set the  
PC Model to CQM1.The CPM1A is compatible with the CQM1.  
PC Interface  
Set the PC Interface to the Peripheral Device Port by selecting PERIPHERAL”  
from the submenu. After selecting the Peripheral Device Port, set the commu-  
nications baud rate to 9,600 baud.  
4-1-2 CPM1A Restrictions and Precautions  
When programming the CPM1A, set the PC Model on the SSS to CQM1.Heed  
the following restrictions when programming the CPM1A.  
Programming Check  
Since the data area of the CQM1 is larger than that of the CPM1A, some parts of  
the area cannot be checked as the CPM1A PC. Pay careful attention to the  
usable data area when programming.  
Note If a program that contains addresses not supported by the CPM1A are trans-  
ferred to the CPM1A, a memory error will occur when operation is begun and  
AR 1308 will turn ON. Refer to the Programming Manual (W353) for differences  
in memory areas.  
Memory Usage  
Since the memory of the the CQM1 is larger than that of the CPM1A, the dis-  
played available memory capacity is larger than the actual available memory  
capacity. Pay careful attention to the actual available memory capacity when  
programming.  
Expansion Instructions  
When a program is transferred after changing the assignment of function codes  
for the 18 expansion instructions, a message to Turn on the DIP switch of the  
PC and execute againis displayed. Change the assignment of the function  
codes for the expansion instructions to the default settings before programming.  
The default settings for the CQM1 are as shown in the following table.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Support Software Capabilities  
Section 4-1  
Function code  
Mnemonic  
ASFT  
Function code  
Mnemonic  
SPED  
17  
18  
19  
47  
48  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
87  
88  
89  
TKY  
PULS  
SCL  
MCMP  
RXD  
TXD  
BCNT  
BCMP  
STIM  
DSW  
7SEG  
INT  
CMPL  
INI  
PRV  
CTBL  
Online Editing  
If unsupported addresses are set in the program for operands or set values,  
error messages will be displayed and the values will not be accepted.  
4-1-3 Offline Operations  
The following operations are possible when not connected online to the PC.  
Group  
Name  
Description  
Programming Connect line  
Save program  
Draws a line between two ladder diagram objects.  
Writes all or part of the user program developed in the system work area to the  
data disk.  
Retrieve program Retrieves all or part of the user program stored on a data disk to the system  
work area.  
Change display  
Search  
Specifies the display modes for the user program.  
Searches for instructions including specified operands. An address from which  
the search is to be started can be specified  
I/O comment  
Creates I/O comments corresponding to bit addresses in the Ladder With  
Comments mode. In addition, reads (searches) and edits the program for  
comments.  
Instr comment  
Block comment  
Edit ladder  
Creates and edits instruction comments for output instructions in the Ladder  
With Comments mode. (C-series PCs only)  
Creates, reads (searches), and edits block comment in the Ladder With  
Comments mode.  
Edits ladder diagrams using the following:  
Moving specified instruction blocks  
Copying specified instruction blocks  
Deleting specified instruction blocks  
Edit comments  
Displays I/O comments simultaneously to write, edit, and search for specified  
comments.  
Retrieve  
comments  
Retrieves comments from the program stored on a data disk. The I/O comments  
are read to the system work area. Instruction comments (C-series PCs only)  
and block comments are copied to the currently displayed program.  
Memory usage  
Clear memory  
Check program  
Displays the used capacity of the user program memory, the number of  
comments used, and the available capacity of the internal memory.  
Clears the user program memory. The starting address for clearing can be  
specified. The comment memory can also be cleared.  
Checks whether the user program contains syntax errors. The check can be  
performed in three levels.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Support Software Capabilities  
Section 4-1  
Group  
Name  
Description  
DM  
Go To Page  
Displays the contents of the data memory in the system work area in pages  
(units of 160 words). The data can be altered with this function. (C-series PCs  
only)  
(data memory)  
Copy  
Fill  
Copies the contents of the DM area of the system work area (data memory  
information).  
Writes the same data to more than one data word in the system work area data  
memory area.  
Print  
Prints a specified range of DM words.  
Hex <—> ASCII  
Specifies the display mode for the data memory contents when the work disk  
data memory contents are to be altered. The display mode can be hexadecimal  
or ASCII.  
Save DM Data  
Writes the contents of a specified range of system work area data memory to  
the data disk.  
Retrieve DM Data Retrieves the saved data disk data memory to the system work area DM area.  
I/O Table  
Write I/O Table  
Check I/O Table  
Save I/O Table  
Edits the I/O table in the system work area.  
Checks the contents of the I/O table in the system work area.  
Writes the I/O table in the system work area to a data disk.  
Retrieve I/O Table Retrieves the I/O table data stored on a data disk to the system work area.  
Print I/O Table Prints an I/O table list. (C-series PCs only)  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Support Software Capabilities  
Section 4-1  
Group  
Utility  
Name  
Description  
Data Area Lists  
Displays lists (such as used areas and cross-references) in accordance with the  
contents of the user program in the system work area.  
Change  
Addresses  
Globally changes bit and word addresses in the user program in the system  
work area.  
Print Lists  
Prints lists, ladder diagrams, and mnemonics in accordance with the contents of  
the user program in the system work area.  
EPROM/Memory  
Card  
Writes, reads, and compares the user program between the PROM  
Writer/Memory Card and system work area.  
Program  
Conversion  
C500 C2000H:  
Converts C500-family programs to C2000H programs.  
C2000H CVM1:  
Converts C2000H-family programs to CVM1 programs  
Create Library  
File  
Creates a library on a floppy disk or hard disk for use as an LSS data disk.  
Accesses the time chart monitor data produced online. (C-series PCs only)  
Time Chart  
Monitor  
Instruction Trace  
Data trace  
Accesses the instruction trace data produced online. (C-series PCs only)  
Accesses the data trace data produced online.  
Set Instructions  
Used to assign instructions to function codes in the instructions table and to  
save and retrieve instructions tables to and from data disk files. (C-series PCs  
only)  
Retrieve/Save  
Instr  
Used to save and retrieve expansion instruction sets to and from data disk files.  
(C-series PCs only)  
PC Setup  
Used to set the PC operating parameters in the PC Setup and to save and  
retrieve PC Setups to and from data disk files.  
Allocate UM  
Used to allocate parts of the user memory area for used as a Fixed DM Area  
and/or I/O Comment Area. (C-series PCs only)  
Network Support  
Table  
Used to edit data link tables and routing tables for the SYSMAC NET and  
SYSMAC LINK Systems.  
File  
Directory  
Displays a file list. Wildcard names can be used to display only desired files.  
Management  
Copy File  
Copies files on the same floppy disk or between different disks.  
Change File Name Changes the name of a specified file.  
Delete File  
Deletes a specified file.  
LSS File  
Used to change between LSS-style data files and DOS-style data files.  
Management  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Support Software Capabilities  
Section 4-1  
4-1-4 Online Operations  
The following operations are possible when connected online to the PC.  
Group  
Name  
Description  
Monitoring Monitor Data  
Uses the lower one third of the screen as a monitor area where bits, words, DM  
contents, and TIM/CNT SV/PV are monitored, forced-set/reset, and changed.  
Transfer Program  
Transfers and compares the user program between the computer and PC.  
Change Display  
C-series PCs  
Ladder W/Comments  
Ladder  
CVM1 PCs  
Ladder  
Ladder (2 rows of comments)  
Ladder (4 rows of comments)  
Online Edit  
Simultaneously edits the PC program and the program in the system work area.  
Reads and displays the scan time of the PC.  
Read Cycle Time  
Clear Area  
Clears the PC data areas such as HR, CNT, AR, and DM (to zero).  
Searches for instructions (including specified operands).  
Searches for I/O comments.  
Search  
I/O Comments  
Block Comments  
Memory Usage  
Searches for block comments.  
Displays used program memory area, the number of comments used, and the  
available capacity of the internal memory.  
DM  
Transfer  
PC > Computer  
Retrieves PC DM data to the system work area. (C-series PCs only)  
Writes system work area DM data to the PC. (C-series PCs only)  
Compares DM data between the system work area and PC. (C-series PCs only)  
Used to monitor DM area contents in the PC. (C-series PCs only)  
Transfer  
Computer>PC  
Transfer  
Verify  
Monitor  
Go To Page  
Reads a specified page from the DM list of the DM area in the system work area  
or PC. (C-series PCs only)  
I/O Table  
Utility  
Transfer I/O Table  
Create I/O Table  
Transfers and compares the I/O table data between the computer and PC.  
Registers into the PC the I/O Units mounted on the PC and then assigns the  
words to the Units.  
Verify I/O Table  
Compares the I/O table registered in the PC against the I/O Units actually  
mounted on the PC.  
File Memory/  
Memory Card  
Displays a file memory list; transfers the file memory contents between the PC  
and computer or the PC and File Memory Unit; clears the file memory; saves or  
retrieves the file memory contents to or from a floppy disk; and edits file memory  
contents  
Time Chart Monitor Used to execute time chart monitoring and to display, save, or retrieve results.  
(C-series PCs only)  
Instruction Trace  
Used to execute instruction traces and used to display, save, or retrieve results.  
(C-series PCs only)  
Data Trace  
Debug  
Used to execute data traces and used to display, save, or retrieve results.  
Used to display the execution status of the specified program section.  
(C-series PCs only)  
Display/Set Clock  
Transfer Instr  
PC Setup  
Used to read and set the internal clock in the PC. (CQM1, C200HS, or CVM1  
only)  
Used to transfer expansion instruction set from the PC to the SSS.  
(C-series PCs only)  
Changes the PC Setup in the PC and in the system work area and used to  
transfer the PC Setup between the PC the disk (save/retrieve).  
Network Support  
Tables  
C-series PCs: Used to input data link tables for SYSMAC NET.  
CVM1 PCs: Used to transfer data link tables and routing tables between Link  
Units, the PC, and the SSS and to compare these tables. Also used  
to start and start data links.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Support Software Capabilities  
Section 4-1  
4-1-5 Offline and Online Operations  
The following operations are possible either online or offline from the PC.  
Group  
Name  
PC model  
Description  
System Setup  
(see note)  
Specifies the model of PC that is being programmed or that is connected to the  
computer.  
PC Interface  
C-series PCs: Specifies whether communications with the PC are performed  
through a SYSMAC NET Link Unit, peripheral interface, or a Host  
Link (RS-232C) interface and the computer port (COM1 or COM2)  
to use. When a Host Link Unit is used, it also specifies the port  
number and baud rate.  
CVM1 PCs: Used to specify the communications protocol for communications  
with the PC, i.e., peripheral or Host Link (RS-232C) interface. The  
baud rate, PC unit number, parity, data length, and number of stop  
bits are designated.  
Network  
address  
Specifies the network address, node number, and data code type of the SYSMAC  
NET Link Unit communicating with the SSS on the SYSMAC NET System. The  
address determines the PC to be connected to for online operations.  
With CVM1 PCs this setting is also used to specify the PC being communicated  
with through networks when connected via a peripheral or Host Link interface.  
I/O table –  
UM transfer  
Specifies whether the I/O table and data link tables are transferred to the user  
program area when the user program is transferred between the computer and  
PC or PROM Writer. (C-series PCs only)  
EPROM  
interface  
Specifies the baud rate and port number of the PROM Writer connected to the  
computer. (C-series PCs only)  
Printer model  
Specifies the printer model.  
Specifies the data disk drive.  
Data disk drive  
OutBit  
Comment Type  
Specifies whether I/O comments or instruction comments are displayed at the  
TIM/CNT, DIFU/DIFD, KEEP, and STEP/SNXT comment display positions.  
(C-series PCs only)  
Exit to DOS  
Terminates SSS operation and returns to DOS.  
Note When the SSS is operating in online mode, the only functions available on the  
System Setup Menu are I/O table UM transfer,” “Data disk drive,and Exit to  
DOS.”  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a Programming Console  
Section 4-2  
4-2 Using a Programming Console  
This section provides information on connecting and using a Programming Con-  
sole. Refer to 5-4 Programming Console Operation Errors for details on errors  
that might occur during Programming Console operations.  
4-2-1 Compatible Programming Consoles  
There are two Programming Consoles that can be used with the CPM1A: The  
CQM1-PRO01-E and the C200H-PRO27-E. The key functions for these Pro-  
gramming Consoles are identical.  
Press and release the Shift Key to input a letter shown in the upper-left corner of  
the key or the upper function of a key that has two functions. For example, the  
CQM1-PRO01-Es AR/HR Key can specify either the AR or HR Area; press and  
release the Shift Key and then press the AR/HR Key to specify the AR Area.  
CQM1-PRO01-E  
LCD display  
Attached Connecting  
Cable (2 m)  
Mode switch  
Operation keys  
C200H-PRO27-E  
LCD display  
Mode switch  
Operation keys  
Cassette recorded jack  
(Cannot be used with the CPM1A).  
Connecting Cables  
C200H-CN222 (2 m)  
C200H-CN422 (4 m)  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a Programming Console  
Section 4-2  
Different Keys  
The following keys are labeled differently on the CQM1-PRO01-E and the  
C200H-PRO27-E, but the operation of the keys in each pair is identical.  
CQM1-PRO01-E Keys  
C200H-PRO27-E Keys  
AR  
HR  
HR  
PLAY  
SET  
SET  
REC  
RESET  
RESET  
Note To specify the AR area, use SHIFT and HR Keys for the C200H-PRO27-E and  
use SHIFT and AR/HR Keys for the CQM1-PRO01-E.  
A shift symbol will be displayed in the upper-right corner of the screen when the  
Shift Key is pressed. The shift input can be cleared by pressing the Shift Key  
again.  
Shift input  
symbol  
^
SHIFT  
Mode Switch  
The mode switch controls the CPM1As operating mode. The key can be re-  
moved when the switch is set to RUN or MONITOR but it cannot be removed  
when the switch is set to PROGRAM.  
Contrast Control  
The display contrast can be adjusted with the control on the right side of the Pro-  
gramming Console.  
Contrast control  
Buzzer Volume  
The C200H-PRO27-Es buzzer volume can be adjusted with the lever on the  
right side of the Programming Console. The CQM1-PRO01-Es buzzer volume  
cannot be adjusted.  
Low volume  
High volume  
C200H-PRO27-E  
Note The buzzer volume can be turned on and off with a key operation. See 4-3-4  
Buzzer Operation for details.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a Programming Console  
Section 4-2  
4-2-2 Changing the CPM1As Mode with the Mode Switch  
Once the Programming Console has been connected, its mode switch can be  
used to change the CPM1As operating mode. The mode display (<PRO-  
GRAM>, <MONITOR>, or <RUN>) will appear on the Programming Console  
screen.  
No key operations can be performed while the mode display is displayed on  
the Programming Console screen. Press CLR to clear the display so that key  
operations can be performed.  
If the SHIFT Key is pressed while the mode switch is turned, the original dis-  
play will remain on the Programming Consoles screen and the mode display  
wont appear.  
The CPM1A will enter RUN mode automatically if a Programming Console  
isnt connected when the CPM1A is turned on.  
MONITOR  
RUN PROGRAM  
MONITOR  
RUN PROGRAM  
MONITOR  
RUN PROGRAM  
Mode display  
<PROGRAM>  
BZ <MONITOR>  
BZ <RUN>  
BZ  
CLR  
SHIFT  
CLR  
Operation  
Operation  
00000  
Initial display  
Operating Modes  
PROGRAM Mode  
The CPM1A program isnt executed in PROGRAM mode. Use PROGRAM  
mode to create and edit the program, clear memory, or check the program for  
errors.  
MONITOR Mode  
The CPM1A program is executed in MONITOR mode and I/O is refreshed just  
as it is in RUN mode. Use MONITOR mode to test system operations, such as  
monitoring CPM1A operating status, force-setting and resetting I/O bits, chang-  
ing the SV/PV of timers and counters, changing word data, and online editing.  
RUN Mode  
This is the CPM1As normal operating mode. The CPM1As operating status can  
be monitored from a Programming Device, but bits cant be force-set/force-reset  
and the SV/PV of timers and counters cant be changed.  
Caution Check the system thoroughly before changing the operating mode of the PC to  
!
!
prevent any accidents that might occur when the program is first started.  
Caution Never change the mode while pressing any of the keys.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a Programming Console  
Section 4-2  
Startup Operating Mode  
The operating mode of the CPM1A when the power is turned ON depends upon  
the PC Setup setting in DM 6600 and the Programming Consoles mode switch  
setting if the Programming Console is connected.  
PC Setup setting  
(DM 6600)  
Programming  
Console connected  
Programming Console not  
connected  
0000  
The startup mode  
determined by the  
mode switch setting.  
RUN mode if no Programming Device  
is connected. PROGRAM mode if  
another Programming Device is  
connected.  
0100  
The startup mode is the same as the operating mode before  
power was interrupted.  
0200  
0201  
0202  
PROGRAM mode  
MONITOR mode  
RUN mode  
Note The default setting is 0000. If a Programming Console is not connected, the PC  
will automatically enter RUN mode. Be sure that it is safe for the PC to operate  
before turning on the PC without a Programming Console connected.  
4-2-3 Connecting the Programming Console  
Connect the Programming Consoles connecting cable to the CPM1As periph-  
eral port, as shown below.  
Panel Installation  
The C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console can be installed in a control panel  
as shown in the following diagram. (The C200H-ATT01 Mounting Bracket is sold  
separately.)  
Mounting hole dimensions  
(DIN43700 standards)  
Mounting Bracket  
Two screws  
+1.1  
0  
186  
+0.8  
0  
92  
Panel thickness: 1.0 to 3.2 mm  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a Programming Console  
Section 4-2  
Allow at least 80 mm for the cable connector above the Programming Console.  
37  
15  
At least 80 mm is required.  
Either connector may  
be used.  
About 70 mm is required.  
4-2-4 Preparation for Operation  
This section describes the procedures required to begin Programming Console  
operation when using the Programming Console for the first time.  
Caution Always confirm that the Programming Console is in PROGRAM mode when  
turning ON the PC with a Programming Console connected unless another  
mode is desired for a specific purpose. If the Programming Console is in RUN  
mode when PC power is turned ON, any program in Program Memory will be  
executed, possibly causing a PC-controlled system to begin operation.  
!
The following sequence of operations must be performed before beginning ini-  
tial program input.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Be sure that the PC is OFF.  
2. Connect the Programming Console to the CPU Units peripheral port. See  
4-2-3 Connecting the Programming Console for details.  
(The CPU Units Communications Switch setting has no effect on commu-  
nications with the Programming Console.)  
3. Set the mode switch to PROGRAM mode.  
4. Turn ON the PC.  
5. Enter the password. See 4-2-5 Entering the Password for details.  
6. Clear (All Clear) the PCs memory. See 4-3-2 Clearing Memory for details.  
7. Read and clear all errors and messages. See 4-3-3 Reading/Clearing Error  
Messages for details.  
8. Start programming.  
4-2-5 Entering the Password  
To gain access to the PCs programming functions, you must first enter the pass-  
word. The password prevents unauthorized access to the program.  
The PC prompts you for a password when PC power is turned on or, if PC power  
is already on, after the Programming Console has been connected to the PC. To  
gain access to the system when the Password!message appears, press CLR  
and then MONTR. Then press CLR to clear the display.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a Programming Console  
Section 4-2  
If the Programming Console is connected to the PC when PC power is already  
on, the first display below will indicate the mode the PC was in before the Pro-  
gramming Console was connected. Ensure that the PC is in PROGRAM mode  
before you enter the password. When the password is entered, the PC will  
shift to the mode set on the mode switch, causing PC operation to begin if the  
mode is set to RUN or MONITOR. The mode can be changed to RUN or MON-  
ITOR with the mode switch after entering the password.  
<PROGRAM>  
PASSWORD!  
<PROGRAM>  
BZ  
Indicates the mode set by the mode selector switch.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Operations  
Section 4-3  
4-3 Programming Console Operations  
4-3-1 Overview  
The following table lists the programming and monitoring operations that can be  
performed from a Programming Console. Refer to the rest of this section for  
details on operational procedures.  
Name  
Function  
Page  
Clearing memory  
Clears all or part of the Program Memory and any data areas that are not  
read-only, as well as the contents of the Programming Consoles memory.  
81  
Reading/clearing error  
messages  
Displays and clears error messages and displays MESSAGE instruction  
messages.  
82  
Buzzer operation  
Turns ON and OFF the buzzer that sounds when Programming Console keys 82  
are pressed.  
Setting a program memory  
address  
Sets the specified program memory address when reading, writing, inserting 83  
and deleting programs.  
Reading a program memory  
Reads the contents of the Program Memory. Displays the status of the  
83  
address/monitoring bit status currently displayed bit in PROGRAM and MONITOR modes.  
Instruction search  
Bit operand search  
Finds occurrences of the specified instruction in the program.  
Finds occurrences of the specified operand bit in the program.  
Inserts or deletes instructions from the program.  
87  
87  
88  
Inserting and deleting  
instructions  
Entering or editing programs Overwrites the contents of the current Program Memory to either input a  
84  
program for the first time or to change a program that already exists.  
Checking the program  
Bit, digit, word monitor  
Checks for programming errors and displays the program address and error 89  
when errors are found.  
Monitors the status of up to 16 bits and words, although only 3 can be shown 90  
on the display at one time.  
Multiple address monitor  
Differentiation monitor  
Binary monitor  
Monitors the status of up to 6 bits and words simultaneously.  
Monitors ON-to-OFF or OFF-to-ON changes in the status of a particular bit.  
Monitors the ON/OFF status of any words 16 bits.  
91  
92  
92  
93  
94  
Three-word monitor  
Signed decimal monitor  
Monitors the status of three consecutive words.  
Converts the contents of the specified word from signed hexadecimal (twos  
complement format) to signed decimal for display.  
Unsigned decimal monitor  
Converts hexadecimal data in a word to unsigned decimal for display.  
94  
Three-word data modification Changes the contents of one or more of the 3 consecutive words displayed in 95  
the Three-word Monitor operation.  
Changing timer, counter SV 1 Changes the SV of a timer or counter.  
95  
96  
96  
Changing timer, counter SV 2 Makes fine adjustment changes to the SV of the timer or counter.  
Hexadecimal, BCD data  
modification  
Changes the BCD or hexadecimal value of a word being monitored.  
Binary data modification  
Changes the status of a words bits when the word is being monitored.  
97  
Signed decimal data  
modification  
Changes the decimal value of a word being monitored as signed decimal data 98  
within a range of 32,768 to 32,767. The contents of the specified word are  
converted automatically to signed hexadecimal (twos complement format.)  
Unsigned decimal data  
modification  
Changes the decimal value of a word being monitored as unsigned decimal  
data within a range of 0 to 65,535. A change to hexadecimal data is made  
automatically.  
99  
Force set/reset  
Forces bits ON (force set) or OFF (force reset.)  
99  
Clear force set/reset  
Hex-ASCII display change  
Restores the status of all bits which have been force set of reset.  
100  
Converts word data displays back and forth between 4-digit hexadecimal data 100  
and ASCII.  
Displaying the cycle time  
Displays the current average cycle time (scan time.)  
101  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Operations  
Section 4-3  
4-3-2 Clearing Memory  
This operation is used to clear all or part of the Program Memory and data areas,  
as well as the contents of the Programming Consoles memory. This operation is  
possible in PROGRAM mode only.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
No  
No  
OK  
Before beginning to program for the first time or when installing a new program,  
clear all areas.  
All Clear  
The following procedure is used to clear memory completely, including the pro-  
gram, all data areas, counter PVs, Data Memory, and the PC Setup (DM 6600 to  
DM 6655).  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Bring up the initial display by pressing the CLR Key repeatedly.  
2. Press the SET, NOT, and then the RESET Key to begin the operation.  
00000MEMORY CLR?  
NOT  
SET  
RESET  
HR CNT DM  
3. Press the MONTR Key to clear memory completely.  
00000MEMORY CLR  
MONTR  
END HR CNT DM  
Caution The PC Setup (DM 6600 through DM 6655) will be cleared when this operation is  
!
performed.  
Partial Clear  
It is possible to retain the data in specified areas or part of the Program Memory.  
To retain the data in the HR, TC, or DM Areas, press the appropriate key after  
pressing SET, NOT, and RESET. Any data area that still appears on the display  
will be cleared when the MONTR Key is pressed.  
The HR Key is used to specify both the AR and HR Areas, the CNT Key is used to  
specify the entire timer/counter area, and the DM Key is used to specify the DM  
Area.  
It is also possible to retain a portion of the Program Memory from the first  
memory address to a specified address. After designating the data areas to  
be retained, specify the first Program Memory address to be cleared. For  
example, input 030 to leave addresses 000 to 029 untouched, but to clear  
addresses from 030 to the end of Program Memory.  
As an example, follow the procedure below to retain the timer/counter area and  
Program Memory addresses 000 through 122:  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.  
2. Press the SET, NOT, and then the RESET Key to begin the operation.  
3. Press the CNT Key to remove the timer/counter area from the data areas  
shown on the display. (Counter PVs will not be cleared.)  
00000MEMORY CLR?  
CNT  
HR  
DM  
4. Press 123 to specify 123 as the starting program address.  
00123MEMORY CLR?  
B 1  
C2  
D3  
HR  
DM  
5. Press the MONTR Key to clear the specified regions of memory.  
00000MEMORY CLR  
MONTR  
END HR  
DM  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Operations  
Section 4-3  
4-3-3 Reading/Clearing Error Messages  
This operation is used to display and clear error messages. It is possible to dis-  
play and clear non-fatal errors and MESSAGE instruction messages in any  
mode, but fatal errors can be cleared in PROGRAM mode only.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
OK  
OK  
OK  
Before inputting a new program, any error messages recorded in memory  
should be cleared. It is assumed here that the causes of any of the errors for  
which error messages appear have already been taken care of. If the buzzer  
sounds when an attempt is made to clear an error message, eliminate the  
cause of the error, and then clear the error message. (Refer to Section 5 Test  
Runs and Error Processing for troubleshooting information.)  
Key Sequence  
Follow the procedure below to display and clear messages.  
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.  
1, 2, 3...  
2. Press the FUN and then the MONTR Key to begin the operation. If there are  
no messages, the following display will appear:  
ERR/MSG CHK OK  
MONTR  
FUN  
If there are messages, the most serious message will be displayed when the  
MONTR Key is pressed. Pressing MONTR again will clear the present mes-  
sage and display the next most serious error message. Continue pressing  
MONTR until all messages have been cleared. These are some examples  
of error messages:  
A memory error:  
MEMORY ERR  
MONTR  
A system error:  
SYS FAIL FAL01  
MONTR  
A message (displayed with MSG(46)):  
MATERIAL USED UP  
MONTR  
All messages cleared:  
ERR/MSG CHK OK  
MONTR  
4-3-4 Buzzer Operation  
This operation is used to turn ON and OFF the buzzer that sounds when Pro-  
gramming Console keys are pressed. This buzzer will also sound whenever an  
error occurs during PC operation. Buzzer operation for errors is not affected by  
this setting.  
This operation is possible in any mode.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
OK  
OK  
OK  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Operations  
Section 4-3  
Key Sequence  
Follow the procedure below to turn the key-input buzzer on and off.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Press the CLR, SHIFT, and then the CLR Key to bring up the mode display.  
In this case the PC is in PROGRAM mode and the buzzer is ON.  
<MONITOR>  
BZ  
CLR  
CLR  
SHIFT  
2. Press the SHIFT and then the 1 Key to turn off the buzzer.  
B 1  
<MONITOR>  
SHIFT  
The buzzer will not sound  
when BZis not displayed.  
3. Press the SHIFT and then the 1 Key again to turn the buzzer back ON.  
<MONITOR>  
BZ  
B 1  
SHIFT  
4-3-5 Setting and Reading a Program Memory Address and Monitoring  
I/O Bit Status  
This operation is used to display the specified program memory address and is  
possible in any mode. In the RUN or MONITOR mode, the I/O bit status of bits in  
the program will be displayed.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
OK  
OK  
OK  
When inputting a program for the first time, it is generally written to Program  
Memory starting from address 000. Because this address appears when the  
display is cleared, it is not necessary to specify it.  
When inputting a program starting from other than 000 or to read or modify a  
program that already exists in memory, the desired address must be desig-  
nated.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.  
2. Input the desired address. It is not necessary to input leading zeroes.  
00200  
C2  
A 0  
A 0  
3. Press the Down Arrow Key.  
00200READ  
LD  
OFF  
00000  
In the RUN or MONITOR mode, ON/  
OFF status of the bit will be displayed.  
Note The ON/OFF status of any displayed bit will be shown if the PC is in  
RUN or MONITOR mode.  
4. Press the Up and Down Arrow Keys to scroll through the program.  
00201READ  
AND  
ON  
00001  
00200READ  
LD  
OFF  
00000  
Pressing the MONTR Key will change to the I/O monitor display. Bits can be  
force-set or force-reset from the I/O monitor display. Press the CLR Key to  
return to I/O bit status monitoring of the initial address.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Operations  
Section 4-3  
4-3-6 Entering or Editing Programs  
This operation is used enter or edit programs. It is possible in PROGRAM mode  
only.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
No  
No  
OK  
The same procedure is used to either input a program for the first time or to  
change a program that already exists. In either case, the current contents of  
Program Memory is overwritten.  
The program shown in the following diagram will be entered to demonstrate  
this operation.  
00002  
Address Instruction  
Operands  
TIM 000  
#0123  
00200  
00201  
LD  
IR  
00002  
12.3 s  
TIM  
000  
#0123  
MOV(021)  
#0100  
00202  
00203  
MOV(021)  
ADB(050)  
#0100  
10  
LR 10  
LR  
ADB(050)  
#0100  
#0100  
#FFF6  
#FFF6  
DM 0000  
DM 0000  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.  
2. Specify the address where the program will begin.  
3. Input the address where the program will begin and press the Down Arrow  
Key. It is not necessary to input leading zeroes.  
00200READ  
C2  
A 0  
A 0  
NOP (000)  
4. Input the first instruction and operand.  
00200  
LD  
C2  
LD  
00002  
5. Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory. The next  
program address will be displayed.  
00201READ  
WRITE  
NOP (000)  
If a mistake was made inputting the instruction, press the Up Arrow Key to  
return to the previous program address and input the instruction again. The  
mistaken instruction will be overwritten  
To specify the Completion Flag for a timer or counter, press the LD, AND,  
OR, or NOT Key followed by the TIM or CNT Key, and then input the timer/  
counter number last.  
6. Input the second instruction and operand. (In this case it isnt necessary to  
enter the timer number, because its 000.) Press the WRITE Key to write the  
instruction to Program Memory.  
00201 TIM DATA  
WRITE  
TIM  
Timer number  
#0000  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Operations  
Section 4-3  
7. Input the second operand (123 to specify 12.3 seconds) and press the  
WRITE Key. The next program address will be displayed.  
00202READ  
B 1  
C2  
D3  
WRITE  
NOP (000)  
If a mistake was made inputting the operand, press the Up Arrow Key to  
return to display the mistaken operand and input the operand again.  
Note a) Counters are input in the same basic way as timers except the  
CNT Key is pressed instead of the TIM Key.  
b) Timer and counter SVs are input in BCD, so it isnt necessary to  
press the CONT/# Key.  
8. Input the third instruction (MOVE) and its operands. First input the instruc-  
tion by pressing the FUN Key and then the function code (21 in this case).  
00202  
C2  
B 1  
FUN  
MOV (021)  
To input the differentiated version of an instruction, press the NOT Key after  
the function code (FUN 2 1 NOT). The @symbol will be displayed next to  
differentiated instructions. Press the NOT Key again to change back the  
instruction back to a non-differentiated instruction. The @symbol will dis-  
appear.  
To change an instruction after it has been entered, simply scroll through the  
program until the desired instruction is displayed and press the NOT Key.  
The @symbol should be displayed next to the instruction.  
9. Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory. The input  
display for the first operand will be displayed.  
00202 MOV DATA A  
WRITE  
000  
Writing Hexadecimal, BCD Constant  
10. Input the first operand.  
The operands of MOV(21) are normally word addresses, but a constant can  
be input by pressing the CONT/# Key first. When the CONT/# Key is  
pressed, the display will change to #0000,indicating that a constant can be  
entered.  
00202 MOV DATA A  
#0100  
B 1  
A 0  
A 0  
CONT  
#
Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory. The input  
display for the second operand will appear.  
00202 MOV DATA B  
WRITE  
000  
Writing a Word Address  
11. Input the second operand.  
00202 MOV DATA B  
LR 10  
B 1  
A 0  
*EM  
LR  
Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory. The next  
program address will be displayed.  
00203READ  
WRITE  
NOP (000)  
Note When the default display value is 000, a word address can be input  
immediately without pressing the Shift and CH/# Keys.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Operations  
Section 4-3  
12. Input the next instruction (ADB).  
00203  
ADB (050)  
F 5  
A 0  
FUN  
Press the WRITE Key to write the instruction to Program Memory.  
00203 ADB DATA A  
WRITE  
000  
Writing an Unsigned Decimal Number  
13. The first operand is input as an unsigned integer.  
00203 ADB DATA A  
#00000  
CONT  
SHIFT  
TR  
NOT  
#
Input the value of the operand from 0 to 65535.  
00203 ADB DATA A  
#00256  
C2  
F 5  
6
Note If an erroneous input is made, press the CLR Key to restore the status  
prior to the input. Then enter the correct input.  
14. Restore the hexadecimal display.  
00203 ADB DATA A  
SHIFT  
TR  
#0100  
Note If an input is made outside of the permissible range, a buzzer will  
sound and the hexadecimal display will not be displayed.  
00203 ADB DATA B  
WRITE  
000  
15. The second operand is input as a signed integer.  
00203 ADB DATA B  
CONT  
SHIFT  
TR  
#+00000  
#
Input the value of the operand from 32,768 to 32,767. Use the SET Key to  
input a positive number, and use the RESET Key to input a negative number.  
00203 ADB DATA B  
B 1  
A 0  
RESET  
#Ć00010  
Note If an erroneous input is made, press the CLR Key to restore the status  
prior to the input. Then enter the correct input.  
16. Restore the hexadecimal display.  
00203 ADB DATA B  
SHIFT  
TR  
#FFF6  
00203 ADB DATA C  
000  
WRITE  
Writing a Word Address (DM 0000)  
17. Input the final operand and then press the WRITE Key. (It isnt necessary to  
input leading zeroes.)  
00203 ADB DATA C  
DM 0000  
EM  
DM  
00204READ  
NOP (000)  
WRITE  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Operations  
Section 4-3  
4-3-7 Instruction Search  
This operation is used to find occurrences of the specified instruction in the pro-  
gram and is possible in any mode.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
OK  
OK  
OK  
The ON/OFF status of any displayed bit will be shown if the PC is in RUN or  
MONITOR mode.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.  
2. Input the address from which the search will begin and press the Down  
Arrow Key. It is not necessary to input leading zeroes.  
00100READ  
B 1  
A 0  
A 0  
TIM  
001  
3. Input the instruction to be found and press the SRCH Key. In this case, the  
search is for OUT 01000.  
In this case, the next OUT 01000 instruction is at address 200, as shown  
below.  
00200SRCH  
B 1  
A 0  
A 0  
A 0  
SRCH  
OUT  
OUT  
01000  
4. Press the Down Arrow Key to display the instructions operands or press the  
SRCH Key to search for the next occurrence of the instruction.  
5. The search will continue until an END instruction or the end of Program  
Memory is reached. In this case, an END instruction was reached at  
address 397.  
Indicates the address  
of END instruction.  
00397SRCH  
SRCH  
END (001)00.4KW  
Indicates the amount used by the user  
program in units of 0.1 Kwords.  
4-3-8 Bit Operand Search  
This operation is used to find occurrences of the specified operand bit in the pro-  
gram and is possible in any mode.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
OK  
OK  
OK  
The ON/OFF status of any displayed bit will be shown if the PC is in RUN or  
MONITOR mode.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.  
2. Input the operand address. It is not necessary to input leading zeroes.  
00000CONT SRCH  
LD 00005  
F 5  
CONT  
#
SHIFT  
3. Press the SRCH Key to begin the search.  
00123CONT SRCH  
LD 00005  
SRCH  
4. Press the SRCH Key to search for the next occurrence of the operand bit.  
00255CONT SRCH  
SRCH  
AND NOT  
00005  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Operations  
Section 4-3  
5. The search will continue until an END instruction or the end of Program  
Memory is reached. In this case, an END instruction was reached.  
Indicates the address  
of END instruction.  
00397CONT SRCH  
SRCH  
END (001)00.4KW  
Indicates the amount used by the user  
program in units of 0.1 Kwords.  
4-3-9 Inserting and Deleting Instructions  
This operation is used to insert or delete instructions from the program. It is pos-  
sible in PROGRAM mode only.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
No  
No  
OK  
To demonstrate this operation, an IR 00105 NO condition will be inserted at  
program address 00206 and an IR 00103 NO condition deleted from address  
00205, as shown in the following diagram.  
Original Program  
Address Instruction  
Operands  
00104  
00100  
00201  
00101  
00103  
Delete  
01000  
00102  
00105  
00205  
00206  
00207  
00208  
AND  
00103  
Delete  
Insert  
AND NOT  
OUT  
00104  
01000  
-
Insert  
END(01)  
END(01)  
Insertion  
Follow the procedure below to insert the IR 00105 NO condition at address  
00206.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.  
2. Input the address where the NO condition will be inserted and press the  
Down Arrow Key. It is not necessary to input leading zeroes.  
00206READ  
C2  
A 0  
6
AND NOT  
00104  
3. Input the new instruction and press the INS Key.  
00206INSERT?  
AND 00105  
B 1  
A 0  
F 5  
AND  
INS  
4. Press the Down Arrow Key to insert the new instruction.  
00207INSERT END  
AND NOT  
00104  
Note For instructions that require more operands (such as set values),  
input the operands and then press the WRITE Key.  
Deletion  
Follow the procedure below to delete the IR 00103 NO condition at address  
00205.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.  
2. Input the address where the NO condition will be deleted and press the  
Down Arrow Key. It is not necessary to input leading zeroes.  
00205READ  
C2  
A 0  
F 5  
AND  
00103  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Operations  
Section 4-3  
3. Press the DEL Key.  
00205DELETE?  
AND 00103  
DEL  
4. Press the Up Arrow Key to delete the specified instruction.  
If the instruction has more operands, the operands will be deleted automati-  
cally with the instruction.  
00205 DELETE END  
AND  
00105  
After completing the insertion and deletion procedures, use the Up and Down  
Arrow Keys to scroll through the program and verify that it has been changed  
correctly, as shown in the following diagram.  
Corrected Program  
Address Instruction  
Operands  
00104  
00100  
00201  
00101  
00102  
00105  
01000  
00205  
00206  
00207  
00208  
AND  
00105  
AND NOT  
OUT  
00104  
01000  
-
END(01)  
END(01)  
4-3-10 Checking the Program  
This operation checks for programming errors and displays the program  
address and error when errors are found. It is possible in PROGRAM mode  
only.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
No  
No  
OK  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.  
2. Press the SRCH Key. An input prompt will appear requesting the desired  
check level.  
00000PROG CHK  
SRCH  
CHK LBL (0Ć2)?  
3. Input the desired check level (0, 1, or 2). The program check will begin when  
the check level is input, and the first error found will be displayed.  
00178CIRCUIT ERR  
A 0  
OUT  
00200  
Note Refer to 5-5 Programming Errors for details on check levels and the  
errors that may be detected when the program is checked.  
4. Press the SRCH Key to continue the search. The next error will be dis-  
played. Continue pressing the SRCH Key to continue the search.  
The search will continue until an END instruction or the end of Program  
Memory is reached. A display like this will appear if the end of Program  
Memory is reached:  
00300NO END INST  
SRCH  
END  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Operations  
Section 4-3  
A display like this will appear if an END instruction is reached:  
00310PROG CHK  
SRCH  
END (001)00.3KW  
No more errors exist if the END  
instruction is displayed.  
If errors are displayed, edit the program to correct the errors and check the pro-  
gram again. Continue checking the program by pressing the SRCH Key again  
until all errors have been corrected.  
4-3-11 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor  
This operation is used to monitor the status of up to 16 bits and words,  
although only 3 can be shown on the display at any one time. Operation is  
possible in any mode.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
OK  
OK  
OK  
Program Read then Monitor When a program address is being displayed, the status of the bit or word in that  
address can be monitored by pressing the MONTR Key.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.  
2. Input the desired program address and press the Down Arrow Key.  
00200READ  
TIM  
OFF  
000  
C2  
A 0  
A 0  
3. Press the MONTR Key to begin monitoring.  
T000  
MONTR  
1234  
If the status of a bit is being monitored, that bits status can be changed using  
the Force Set/Reset operation. Refer to 4-3-23 Force Set, Reset for details.  
If the status of a word is being monitored, that words value can be changed  
using the Hexadecimal/BCD Data Modification operation. Refer to 4-3-19  
Hexadecimal, BCD Data Modification, 4-3-20 Binary Data Modification,  
4-3-21 Signed Decimal Data Modification, and 4-3-22 Unsigned Decimal  
Data Modification for details.  
4. Press the CLR Key to end monitoring.  
00200  
CLR  
TIM  
000  
Bit Monitor  
Follow the procedure below to monitor the status of a particular bit.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.  
2. Input the bit address of the desired bit and press the MONTR Key.  
00001  
B 1  
CONT  
SHIFT  
MONTR  
^ ON  
#
The Up or Down Arrow Key can be pressed to display the status of the pre-  
vious or next bit.  
The displayed bits status can be changed using the Force Set/Reset opera-  
tion. Refer to Refer to 4-3-23 Force Set, Reset for details.  
3. Press the CLR Key to end monitoring.  
00000  
CLR  
CONT  
00001  
Word Monitor  
Follow the procedure below to monitor the status of a particular word.  
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.  
1, 2, 3...  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Operations  
Section 4-3  
2. Input the word address of the desired word.  
00000  
B 1  
CH  
*EM  
LR  
SHIFT  
*DM  
CHANNEL LR  
01  
3. Press the MONTR Key to begin monitoring.  
cL01  
MONTR  
FFFF  
The Up or Down Arrow Key can be pressed to display the status of the pre-  
vious or next word.  
The displayed words status can be changed using the Hexadecimal/BCD  
Data Modification operation. Refer to Refer to 4-3-19 Hexadecimal, BCD  
Data Modification, 4-3-20 Binary Data Modification, 4-3-21 Signed Decimal  
Data Modification, and 4-3-22 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification for  
details.  
4. Press the CLR Key to end monitoring.  
00000  
CLR  
CHANNEL LR 01  
Note The operating mode can be changed without altering the current monitor display  
by holding down the SHIFT Key and then changing the operating mode.  
Multiple Address  
Monitoring  
The status of up to six bits and words can be monitored simultaneously, although  
only three can be shown on the display at any one time.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.  
2. Input the address of the first bit or word and press the MONTR Key.  
T000  
MONTR  
TIM  
0100  
3. Repeat step 2 up to 6 times to display the next addresses to be monitored.  
00001 T000  
B 1  
CONT  
SHIFT  
MONTR  
^ OFF 0100  
#
D000000001 T000  
0000^ OFF 0100  
MONTR  
DM  
If 4 or more bits and words are being monitored, the bits and words that do  
not appear on the display can be displayed by pressing the MONTR Key. If  
the MONTR Key is pressed alone, the display will shift to the right.  
If more than six bits and/or words are input, monitoring of the bit or word  
input first will be canceled.  
4. Press the CLR Key to stop monitoring the leftmost bit or word and clear it  
from the display.  
00001 T000  
CLR  
^ OFF 0100  
5. Press the SHIFT and CLR Keys to end monitoring altogether.  
00000  
SHIFT  
CLR  
CONT  
00001  
Note Press the SHIFT Key, CLR Key, and then CLR Key again to return to the initial  
Programming Console display with the multiple address monitoring state  
unchanged. Press the SHIFT Key and then the MONTR Key from the initial dis-  
play to return to the multiple address monitoring state. The monitoring states can  
be retained for 6 bits and words.  
The operating mode can be changed without altering the current monitor display  
by holding down the SHIFT Key and then changing the operating mode.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Operations  
Section 4-3  
4-3-12 Differentiation Monitor  
This operation is used to monitor the up (OFF-to-ON) or down (ON-to-OFF)  
differentiation status of a particular bit. When detected, the up or down differ-  
entiation will be displayed and the buzzer will sound. It is possible in any  
mode.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
OK  
OK  
OK  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Monitor the status of the desired bit according to the procedure described in  
4-3-11 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor. If 2 or more bits are being monitored, the  
desired bit should be leftmost on the display.  
In this case the differentiation status of LR 00 will be monitored.  
L000000001H0000  
^ OFF^ OFF^ OFF  
2. To specify up-differentiation monitoring, press the SHIFT and then the Up  
Arrow Key. The symbols U@will appear.  
L000000001H0000  
SHIFT  
U@OFF^ OFF^ OFF  
Indicates waiting for the bit to turn ON.  
To specify down-differentiation monitoring, press the SHIFT and then the  
Down Arrow Key. The symbols D@will appear.  
L000000001H0000  
SHIFT  
D@OFF^ OFF^ OFF  
3. The buzzer will sound when the specified bit goes from off to on (for up-dif-  
ferentiation) or from on to off (for down-differentiation).  
L000000001H0000  
^ ON^ OFF^ OFF  
Note The buzzer will not sound if it has been turned off.  
4. Press the CLR Key to end differentiation monitoring and return to the normal  
monitoring display.  
L000000001H0000  
CLR  
^ OFF^ OFF^ OFF  
4-3-13 Binary Monitor  
This operation is used to monitor the ON/OFF status of any words 16 bits. It  
is possible in any mode.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
OK  
OK  
OK  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Monitor the status of the desired word according to the procedure described  
in 4-3-11 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor. The desired word should be leftmost on  
the display if 2 or more words are being monitored.  
c010  
0000  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Operations  
Section 4-3  
(Word monitor)  
2. Press the SHIFT and then the MONTR Key to begin binary monitoring. The  
ON/OFF status of the selected words 16 bits will be shown along the bottom  
of the display. A 1 indicates a bit is on, and a 0 indicates it is off.  
c010 MONTR  
SHIFT MONTR  
0000000000000000  
Bit 15  
Bit 00  
The status of force-set bits is indicated by S,and the status of a force-reset  
bits is indicated by R,as shown below.  
c010 MONTR  
000S0000000R0000  
Force-set bit  
Force-reset bit  
Note a) The status of displayed bits can be changed at this point. Refer to  
4-3-20 Binary Data Modification for details.  
b) The Up or Down Arrow Key can be pressed to display the status of  
the previous or next words bits.  
3. Press the CLR Key to end binary monitoring and return to the normal moni-  
toring display.  
c010  
CLR  
0000  
4-3-14 Three-word Monitor  
This operation is used to monitor the status of three consecutive words. It is  
possible in any mode.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
OK  
OK  
OK  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Monitor the status of the first of the three words according to the procedure  
described in 4-3-11 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor.  
If 2 or more words are being monitored, the desired first word should be left-  
most on the display.  
c200  
89AB  
(Word monitor)  
2. Press the EXT Key to begin 3-word monitoring. The status of the selected  
word and the next two words will be displayed, as shown below. In this case,  
DM 0000 was selected.  
c202 c201 c200  
EXT  
0123 4567 89AB  
The Up and Down Arrow Keys can be used to shift one address up or down.  
The status of the displayed words can be changed at this point. Refer to  
4-3-17 Three-word Data Modification.  
The display can be changed to display ASCII text, which is useful when  
three consecutive words containing an ASCII message are displayed. Refer  
to 4-3-25 Hex-ASCII Display Change.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Operations  
Section 4-3  
3. Press the CLR Key to end 3-word monitoring and return to the normal moni-  
toring display. The rightmost word on the 3-word monitor display will be  
monitored.  
c200  
CLR  
89AB  
Note The operating mode can be changed without altering the current monitor display  
by holding down the SHIFT Key and then changing the operating mode.  
4-3-15 Signed Decimal Monitor  
This operation converts the contents of the displayed word from signed hexa-  
decimal (twos complement format) to signed decimal for display. The opera-  
tion can be executed while using I/O monitoring, multiple address monitoring  
or 3-word monitoring.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
OK  
OK  
OK  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Monitor the word that is to be used for decimal monitor with sign. During mul-  
tiple address monitoring, the leftmost word will be converted.  
c200 cL0020000  
FFF0 0000^ OFF  
(Multiple address monitor)  
2. Press the SHIFT and TR Keys to display the leftmost word as signed deci-  
mal.  
c200  
SHIFT  
TR  
Ć00016  
At this point, the contents of the displayed word can be changed with a  
signed-decimal input. Refer to 4-3-21 Signed Decimal Data Modification.  
3. Press the CLR Key or the SHIFT and TR Keys to end the unsigned decimal  
display and return to normal monitoring.  
c200 cL0020000  
CLR  
FFF0 0000^ OFF  
4-3-16 Unsigned Decimal Monitor  
This operation is used to convert hexadecimal data in a word to unsigned  
decimal for display. The operation can be executed while using I/O monitor-  
ing, multiple address monitoring or 3-word monitoring.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
OK  
OK  
OK  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Monitor the word that is to be used for decimal monitor without sign. During  
multiple address monitoring, the leftmost word will be converted.  
c200 cL0020000  
FFF0 0000^ OFF  
Multiple address monitoring  
2. Press the SHIFT Key, TR Key, and then NOT Key to display the leftmost  
word as unsigned decimal.  
c200  
SHIFT  
TR  
NOT  
65520  
At this point, the contents of the displayed word can be changed with an  
unsigned-decimal input. Refer to 4-3-22 Unsigned Decimal Data Modifica-  
tion.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Operations  
Section 4-3  
3. Press the CLR Key or the SHIFT and TR Keys to end the unsigned decimal  
display and return to normal monitoring.  
c200 cL0020000  
CLR  
FFF0 0000^ OFF  
4-3-17 Three-word Data Modification  
This operation is used to change the contents of one or more of the 3 con-  
secutive words displayed in the Three-word Monitor operation. It is possible  
in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
No  
OK  
OK  
Caution Before changing the contents of I/O memory, be sure that the changes will not  
cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously. In particular, take  
care when changing the status of output bits. The PC continues to refresh I/O  
bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode, so devices connected to output points  
on the CPU Unit or Expansion I/O Units may operate unexpectedly.  
!
1, 2, 3...  
1. Monitor the status of the desired words according to the procedure  
described 4-3-14 Three-word Monitor.  
D0002D0001D0000  
0123 4567 89AB  
(Three-word monitor)  
2. Press the CHG Key to begin 3-word data modification. The cursor will  
appear next to the contents of the leftmost word.  
D0002 3CH CHG?  
CHG  
00123 4567 89AB  
3. Input the new value for the leftmost word on the display and press the CHG  
Key if more changes will be made.  
(Input the new value and press the WRITE Key to write the changes in  
memory if no more changes will be made.)  
D0002 3CH CHG?  
B 1  
CHG  
0001 4567 89AB  
4. Input the new value for the middle word on the display and press the CHG  
Key if the rightmost word will be changed. Input the new value and press the  
WRITE Key to write the changes in memory if the rightmost word will not be  
changed. (In this case, it will not.)  
D0002D0001D0000  
C2  
D3  
E 4  
WRITE  
0001 0234 89AB  
Note If the CLR Key is pressed before the WRITE Key, the operation will be cancelled  
and the 3-word monitor display will return without any changes in data memory.  
4-3-18 Changing Timer, Counter SV  
There are two operations that can be used to change the SV of a timer or  
counter. They are possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only. In MON-  
ITOR mode, the SV can be changed while the program is being executed.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
No  
OK  
OK  
The timer or counter SV can be changed either by inputting a new value or  
by incrementing or decrementing the current SV.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Operations  
Section 4-3  
Inputting a New SV  
Constant  
This operation can be used to input a new SV constant, as well as to change an  
SV from a constant to a word address designation and vice versa. The following  
examples show how to input a new SV constant and how to change the SV from  
a constant to an address.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.  
2. Display the desired timer or counter.  
00201SRCH  
B 1  
SRCH  
TIM  
TIM  
001  
3. Press the Down Arrow Key and then the CHG Key.  
00201DATA?  
CHG  
T001 #0134 #????  
4. At this point a new SV constant can be input or the SV constant can be  
changed to a word address designation  
a) To input a new SV constant, input the constant and press the WRITE  
Key.  
00201 TIM DATA  
B 1  
C2  
E 4  
WRITE  
#0124  
b) To change to a word address designation, input the word address and  
press the WRITE Key.  
00201 TIM DATA  
HR 10  
B 1  
A 0  
CH  
*
AR  
HR  
SHIFT  
WRITE  
Incrementing and  
Decrementing a Constant  
This operation can be used to increment and decrement an SV constant. It is  
possible only when the SV has been entered as a constant.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.  
2. Display the desired timer or counter.  
00201SRCH  
SRCH  
TIM  
TIM  
000  
3. Press the Down Arrow, CHG, and then the EXT Key.  
00201DATA ? U/D  
T000 #0123 #0123  
EXT  
CHG  
The constant on the left is the old SV and the constant on the right will  
become the new SV constant in step 5.  
4. Press the Up Arrow Key to decrement and the Down Arrow Keys to incre-  
ment the constant on the right. (In this case the SV is incremented once.)  
00201DATA ? U/D  
T000 #0123 #0124  
5. Press the CLR Key twice to change the timers SV to the new value.  
00201 TIM DATA  
CLR  
CLR  
#0124  
4-3-19 Hexadecimal, BCD Data Modification  
This operation is used to change contents of a memory address or the pres-  
ent value of a timer/counter being monitored using the procedure described  
in 4-3-11 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor. It is possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM  
mode only.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
No  
OK  
OK  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Operations  
Section 4-3  
Words SR 253 to SR 255 cannot be changed.  
Caution Before changing the contents of I/O memory, be sure that the changes will not  
cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously. In particular, take  
care when changing the status of output bits. The PC continues to refresh I/O  
bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode, so devices connected to output points  
on the CPU Unit or Expansion I/O Units may operate unexpectedly.  
!
1, 2, 3...  
1. Monitor the status of the desired word according to the procedure described  
in 4-3-11 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor. If two or more words are being monitored,  
the desired word should be leftmost on the display.  
D0000  
0119  
(Word monitor)  
2. Press the CHG Key to begin hexadecimal, BCD data modification.  
PRES VAL?  
CHG  
D0000 0119 ????  
3. Input the new PV and press the WRITE Key to change the PV.  
The operation will end and the normal monitoring display will return when  
the WRITE Key is pressed.  
D0000  
C2  
A 0  
A 0  
WRITE  
0200  
4-3-20 Binary Data Modification  
This operation is used to change the status of a words bits when the word is  
monitored using the procedure described in 4-3-13 Binary Monitor. It is pos-  
sible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
No  
OK  
OK  
Bits SR 25300 to SR 25507 and timer/counter flags cannot be changed.  
Caution Before changing the contents of I/O memory, be sure that the changes will not  
cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously. In particular, take  
care when changing the status of output bits. The PC continues to refresh I/O  
bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode, so devices connected to output points  
on the CPU Unit or Expansion I/O Units may operate unexpectedly.  
!
1, 2, 3...  
1. Monitor the status of the desired word according to the procedure described  
4-3-13 Binary Monitor.  
D0000 MONTR  
1000010101010101  
Bit 15  
Bit 00  
(Binary monitor)  
2. Press the CHG Key to begin binary data modification.  
D0000 CHG?  
CHG  
1000010101010101  
A flashing cursor will appear over bit 15. The cursor indicates which bit can  
be changed.  
3. Three sets of keys are used to move the cursor and change bit status:  
a) Use the Up and Down Arrow Keys to move the cursor to the left and right.  
D0000 CHG?  
1000010101010101  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Operations  
Section 4-3  
b) Use the 1 and 0 Keys to change a bits status to on or off. The cursor will  
move one bit to the right after one of these keys is pressed.  
D0000 CHG?  
B 1  
1010010101010101  
c) Use the SHIFT and SET and SHIFT and RESET Keys to force-set or  
force-reset a bits status. The cursor will move one bit to the right after  
one of these keys is pressed. The NOT Key will clear force-set or force-  
reset status.  
Note Bits in the DM Area cannot be force-set or force-reset.  
4. Press the WRITE Key to write the changes in memory and return to the  
binary monitor.  
D0000 MONTR  
WRITE  
1010010101010101  
4-3-21 Signed Decimal Data Modification  
This operation is used to change the decimal value of a word being moni-  
tored as signed decimal data, within a range of 32,768 to 32,767. The con-  
tents of the specified word are converted automatically to signed hexadeci-  
mal (twos complement format).  
Words SR 253 to SR 255 cannot be changed.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
No  
OK  
OK  
Caution Before changing the contents of I/O memory, be sure that the changes will not  
cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously. In particular, take  
care when changing the status of output bits. The PC continues to refresh I/O  
bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode, so devices connected to output points  
on the CPU Unit or Expansion I/O Units may operate unexpectedly.  
!
1, 2, 3...  
1. Monitor (signed decimal) the status of the word for which the present value  
is to be changed.  
D0200  
Ć00016  
(Signed decimal monitor)  
2. Press the CHG Key to begin decimal data modification.  
PRES VAL?  
CHG  
D0200Ć00016  
3. Input the new PV and press the WRITE Key to change the PV. The operation  
will end and the signed-decimal monitoring display will return when the  
WRITE Key is pressed.  
The PV can be set within a range of 32,768 and 32,767. Use the SET Key to  
input a positive number, and use the RESET Key to input a negative number.  
D0200  
D3  
C2  
7
6
8
WRITE  
RESET  
Ć32768  
If an erroneous input has been made, press the CLR Key to restore the sta-  
tus prior to the input. Then enter the correct input.  
The buzzer will sound if a value outside the specified range is input, allowing  
no writing.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Operations  
Section 4-3  
4-3-22 Unsigned Decimal Data Modification  
This operation is used to change the decimal value of a word being moni-  
tored as unsigned decimal data, within a range of 0 to 65,535. A change into  
hexadecimal data is made automatically.  
Words SR 253 to SR 255 cannot be changed.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
No  
OK  
OK  
Caution Before changing the contents of I/O memory, be sure that the changes will not  
cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously. In particular, take  
care when changing the status of output bits. The PC continues to refresh I/O  
bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode, so devices connected to output points  
on the CPU Unit or Expansion I/O Units may operate unexpectedly.  
!
1, 2, 3...  
1. Monitor (unsigned decimal) the status of the word for which the present  
value is to be changed.  
c200  
65520  
(Unsigned decimal monitor)  
2. Press the CHG Key to begin decimal data modification.  
PRES VAL?  
CHG  
c200 65520  
3. Input the new PV and press the WRITE Key to change the PV. The operation  
will end and the decimal-without-sign monitoring display will return when the  
WRITE Key is pressed.  
The PV can be set within a range of 0 to 65,535.  
c200  
D3  
C2  
7
6
8
WRITE  
32768  
If an erroneous input has been made, press the CLR Key to restore the sta-  
tus prior to the input. Then enter the correct input.  
The buzzer will sound if a value outside the specified range is input, allowing  
no writing.  
4-3-23 Force Set, Reset  
This operation is used to force bits ON (force set) or OFF (force reset) and is  
useful when debugging the program or checking output wiring. It is possible  
in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
No  
OK  
OK  
Caution Before changing the contents of I/O memory, be sure that the changes will not  
cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously. In particular, take  
care when changing the status of output bits. The PC continues to refresh I/O  
bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode, so devices connected to output points  
on the CPU Unit or Expansion I/O Units may operate unexpectedly.  
!
1, 2, 3...  
1. Monitor the status of the desired bit according to the procedure described in  
4-3-11 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor. If two or more words are being monitored,  
the desired bit should be leftmost on the display.  
0000020000  
^ OFF^ ON  
(Multiple address monitor)  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Console Operations  
Section 4-3  
2. Press the SET Key to force the bit ON or press the RESET Key to force the  
bit OFF.  
0000020000  
SET  
ON^ ON  
The cursor in the lower left corner of the display indicates that the force set/  
reset is in progress. Bit status will remain ON or OFF only as long as the key  
is held down; the original status will return one cycle after the key is  
released.  
3. Press the SHIFT and SET Keys or SHIFT and RESET Keys to maintain the  
status of the bit after the key is released. In this case, the force-set status is  
indicated by an Sand the force-reset status is indicated by an R.”  
To return the bit to its original status, press the NOT Key or perform the Clear  
Force Set/Reset operation. Refer to 4-3-24 Clear Force Set/Reset for  
details.  
Forced status will also be cleared in the following cases:  
a) When the PCs operating mode is changed (although the forced status  
will not be cleared when the mode is changed between PROGRAM and  
MONITOR if SR 25211 is ON)  
b) When the PC stops because a fatal error occurred  
c) When the PC stops because of a power interruption  
d) When the Clear Force Set/Reset Operation is performed  
4-3-24 Clear Force Set/Reset  
This operation is used to restore the status of all bits which have been force  
set or reset. It is possible in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode only.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
No  
OK  
OK  
Caution Before changing the contents of I/O memory, be sure that the changes will not  
cause equipment to operate unexpectedly or dangerously. In particular, take  
care when changing the status of output bits. The PC continues to refresh I/O  
bits even if the PC is in PROGRAM mode, so devices connected to output points  
on the CPU Unit or Expansion I/O Units may operate unexpectedly.  
!
1, 2, 3...  
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.  
2. Press the SET and then the RESET Key. A confirmation message will  
appear.  
00000FORCE RELE?  
SET  
RESET  
Note If you mistakenly press the wrong key, press CLR and start again  
from the beginning.  
3. Press the NOT Key to clear the force-set/reset status of bits in all data areas.  
00000FORCE RELE  
NOT  
END  
4-3-25 Hex-ASCII Display Change  
This operation is used to convert word data displays back and forth between  
4-digit hexadecimal data and ASCII. It is possible in any mode.  
The displayed PV of the timer or counter cannot be changed.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
OK  
OK  
OK  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Example  
Section 4-4  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Monitor the status of the desired word(s) according to the procedure  
described in 4-3-11 Bit, Digit, Word Monitor. While the multiple addresses  
are being monitored, the leftmost word is subject to change.  
D0000D0001  
4142 3031  
(Multiple address monitor)  
2. Press the TR Key to switch to ASCII display. The display will toggle between  
hexadecimal and ASCII displays each time the TR Key is pressed.  
D0000 D0001  
TR  
"AB" 3031  
D0000D0001  
TR  
4142 3031  
Note 1. A message contained in three words can be displayed by using ASCII dis-  
play in combination with the 3-word monitor operation.  
2. The Hexadecimal, BCD Data Modification Operation can be used while dis-  
playing ASCII data. Input values in 4-digit hexadecimal.  
4-3-26 Displaying the Cycle Time  
This operation is used to display the current average cycle time (scan time).  
It is possible only in RUN or MONITOR mode while the program is being  
executed.  
RUN  
MONITOR  
PROGRAM  
OK  
OK  
No  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.  
2. Press the MONTR Key to display the cycle time.  
00000SCAN TIME  
MONTR  
012.1MS  
MSin the display indicates  
the unit msfor the cycle time.  
There might be differences in displayed values when the MONTR Key is  
pressed repeatedly. These differences are caused by changing execution  
conditions.  
4-4 Programming Example  
This section demonstrates all of the steps needed to write a program with the  
Programming Console.  
4-4-1 Preparatory Operations  
Use the following procedure when writing a program to the CPM1A for the first  
time.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Set the Programming Consoles mode switch to PROGRAM mode and turn  
on the CPM1As power supply. The password input display will appear on  
the Programming Console.  
MONITOR  
RUN  
PROGRAM  
<PROGRAM>  
PASSWORD!  
2. Enter the password by pressing the CLR and then the MONTR Key.  
<PROGRAM> BZ  
CLR MONTR  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Example  
Section 4-4  
3. Clear the CPM1As memory by pressing the CLR, SET, NOT, RESET, and  
then the MONTR Key. Press the CLR Key several times if memory errors are  
displayed.  
00000  
CLR  
00000MEMORY CLR?  
NOT  
SET  
RESET  
MONTR  
HR CNT DM  
00000MEMORY CLR  
END HR CNT DM  
4. Display and clear error messages by pressing the CLR, FUN, and then the  
MONTR Key. Continue pressing the MONTR Key until all error messages  
have been cleared.  
00000  
CLR  
00000  
FUN  
FUN (0??)  
ERR/MSG CHK OK  
MONTR  
5. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial programming display (program  
address 00000). The new program can be written at this point.  
00000  
CLR  
Caution Check the system thoroughly before starting or stopping the CPM1A to prevent  
!
any accidents that might occur when the program is first started.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Example  
Section 4-4  
4-4-2 Example Program  
The following ladder program will be used to demonstrate how to write a pro-  
gram with the Programming Console. This program makes output IR 01000  
flicker ON/OFF (one second ON, one second OFF) ten times after input  
IR 00000 is turned ON.  
Start input  
00000  
C000  
T002  
T002  
T001  
20000  
Self-holding bit  
00000  
00004  
00007  
20000  
20000  
TIM 001  
#0010  
1-second timer  
2-second timer  
20000  
TIM 002  
#0020  
20000  
20000  
Count input  
Reset input  
CP  
R
00010  
CNT 000  
#0010  
10-count counter  
20000  
T001  
Flicker output (10 counts)  
01000  
00014  
00017  
ON  
OFF  
1
S
END(01)  
The mnemonic list for the example program is shown in the following table. The  
steps required to enter this program from a Programming Console are described  
in 4-4-3 Programming Procedures.  
Address  
Instruction  
Data  
Programming example  
procedures in 4-4-3  
Programming Procedures  
(1) Self-holding bit  
(2) 1-second timer  
(3) 2-second timer  
(4) 10-count counter  
00000  
LD  
00000  
20000  
000  
00001  
00002  
00003  
00004  
00005  
00006  
OR  
AND NOT  
OUT  
C
20000  
20000  
002  
LD  
AND NOT  
TIM  
T
#
T
#
T
001  
0010  
20000  
002  
00007  
00008  
00009  
LD  
AND NOT  
TIM  
002  
0020  
20000  
001  
00010  
00011  
00012  
00013  
LD  
AND  
LD NOT  
CNT  
20000  
000  
#
T
0010  
20000  
001  
(5) Flicker output (10 counts)  
(6) END(01) instruction  
00014  
00015  
00016  
00017  
LD  
AND NOT  
OUT  
01000  
---  
END (01)  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Example  
Section 4-4  
4-4-3 Programming Procedures  
The example program will be written to the CPM1A according to the mnemonic  
list in 4-4-2 Example Program. The procedure is performed beginning with the  
initial display. (Clear the memory before entering a new program.)  
Note If an error occurs while inputting the program, refer to 5-4 Programming Console  
Operation Errors for details on correcting the error. Refer to the relevant Support  
Software Operation Manual for details on errors that appear when operating the  
SSS or SYSMAC-CPT Support Software.  
(1) Inputting the Self-holding Bit  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Input the normally open condition IR 00000.  
(It isnt necessary to input leading zeroes.)  
00000  
LD  
LD  
00000  
00001READ  
NOP (000)  
WRITE  
2. Input the OR condition IR 20000.  
00001  
OR  
C2  
A 0  
A 0  
A 0  
A 0  
OR  
20000  
00002READ  
NOP (000)  
WRITE  
3. Input the normally closed AND condition C000.  
(It isnt necessary to input leading zeroes.)  
00002  
AND  
NOT  
CNT  
AND NOT CNT 000  
00003READ  
NOP (000)  
WRITE  
4. Input the OUT instruction IR 20000.  
00003  
C2  
A 0  
A 0  
A 0  
A 0  
OUT  
OUT  
20000  
00004READ  
NOP (000)  
WRITE  
(2) Inputting the One-second Timer  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Input the normally open condition IR 20000.  
00004  
C2  
A 0  
A 0  
A 0  
A 0  
LD  
LD  
20000  
00005READ  
NOP (000)  
WRITE  
2. Input the normally closed AND condition T002.  
(It isnt necessary to input leading zeroes.)  
00005  
C2  
AND  
NOT  
TIM  
AND NOT TIM 002  
00006READ  
NOP (000)  
WRITE  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Example  
Section 4-4  
3. Input the 1-second timer T001.  
00006  
TIM  
B 1  
TIM  
001  
00006 TIM DATA  
#0000  
WRITE  
4. Input the SV for T001 (#0010 = 1.0 s).  
00006 TIM DATA  
#0010  
B 1  
A 0  
00007READ  
NOP (000)  
WRITE  
(3) Inputting the  
Two-second Timer  
The following key operations are used to input the 2-second timer.  
1. Input the normally open condition IR 20000.  
00007  
1, 2, 3...  
C2  
A 0  
A 0  
A 0  
A 0  
LD  
LD  
20000  
00008READ  
NOP (000)  
WRITE  
2. Input the normally closed AND condition T002.  
(It isnt necessary to input leading zeroes.)  
00008  
C2  
AND  
NOT  
TIM  
AND NOT TIM 002  
00009READ  
NOP (000)  
WRITE  
3. Input the 2-second timer T002.  
00009  
TIM  
C2  
TIM  
002  
00009 TIM DATA  
#0000  
WRITE  
4. Input the SV for T002 (#0020 = 2.0 s).  
00009 TIM DATA  
#0020  
C2  
A 0  
00010READ  
NOP (000)  
WRITE  
(4) Inputting the 10-count  
Counter  
The following key operations are used to input the 10-count counter.  
1. Input the normally open condition IR 20000.  
00010  
1, 2, 3...  
C2  
A 0  
A 0  
A 0  
A 0  
LD  
LD  
20000  
00011READ  
NOP (000)  
WRITE  
2. Input the normally open AND condition T001.  
(It isnt necessary to input leading zeroes.)  
00011  
AND  
B 1  
AND  
TIM  
TIM 001  
00012READ  
NOP (000)  
WRITE  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Example  
Section 4-4  
3. Input the normally closed condition IR 20000.  
00012  
C2  
A 0  
A 0  
A 0  
A 0  
LD  
NOT  
LD NOT  
20000  
00013READ  
NOP (000)  
WRITE  
4. Input the counter 000.  
00013  
CNT  
A 0  
CNT  
000  
00013 CNT DATA  
#0000  
WRITE  
5. Input the SV for counter 000 (#0010 = 10 counts).  
00013 CNT DATA  
B 1  
A 0  
#0010  
00014READ  
NOP (000)  
WRITE  
(5) Inputting the Flicker Output  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Input the normally open condition IR 20000.  
000014  
C2  
A 0  
A 0  
A 0  
A 0  
LD  
LD  
20000  
00015READ  
NOP (000)  
WRITE  
2. Input the normally closed AND condition T001.  
(It isnt necessary to input leading zeroes.)  
00015  
B 1  
AND  
NOT  
TIM  
AND NOT TIM 001  
00016READ  
NOP (000)  
WRITE  
3. Input the OUT instruction IR 01000.  
(It isnt necessary to input leading zeroes.)  
00016  
B 1  
A 0  
A 0  
A 0  
OUT  
OUT  
01000  
00017READ  
NOP (000)  
WRITE  
(6) Inputting the END(001)  
Instruction  
Input END(01). (The display shows three digits in the function code, but only the  
last two digits are input for CPM1A PCs.)  
00017  
FUN  
FUN (0??)  
00017  
A 0  
B 1  
END (001)  
00018READ  
NOP (000)  
WRITE  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Example  
Section 4-4  
4-4-4 Checking the Program  
Check the program syntax in PROGRAM mode to make sure that the program  
has been input correctly.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.  
00000  
CLR  
2. Press the SRCH Key. An input prompt will appear requesting the desired  
check level.  
00000PROG CHK  
SRCH  
CHK LBL (0Ć2)?  
3. Input the desired check level (0, 1, or 2). The program check will begin when  
the check level is input, and the first error found will be displayed. If no errors  
are found, the following display will appear.  
00017PROG CHK  
A 0  
END (001)00.1KW  
Note Refer to 5-5 Programming Errors for details on check levels and the  
programming errors that may be displayed during a program check.  
4. Press the SRCH Key to continue the search. The next error will be dis-  
played. Continue pressing the SRCH Key to continue the search.  
The search will continue until an END(01) instruction or the end of Program  
Memory is reached.  
If errors are displayed, edit the program to correct the errors and check the pro-  
gram again. Continue checking the program until all errors have been corrected.  
4-4-5 Test Run in MONITOR Mode  
Switch the CPM1A in MONITOR mode and check the operation of the program.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Set the Programming Consoles mode switch to MONITOR mode.  
MONITOR  
RUN  
PROGRAM  
<MONITOR>  
BZ  
2. Press the CLR Key to bring up the initial display.  
00000  
CLR  
3. Force-set the start input bit (IR 00000) from the Programming Console to  
start the program.  
00000  
LD  
LD  
00000  
00000  
^ OFF  
MONTR  
SET  
00000  
ON  
The cursor in the lower left corner of the display indicates that the force set is  
in progress. The bit will remain ON as long as the Set Key is held down.  
4. The output indicator for output IR 01000 will flash ten times if the program is  
operating correctly. The indicator should go OFF after ten one-second  
flashes.  
There is a mistake in the program if the output indicator doesnt flash. In this  
case, check the program and force set/reset bits to check operation.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECTION 5  
Test Runs and Error Processing  
This section describes procedures for test runs of CPM1A operation, self-diagnosis functions, and error processing to identify  
and correct the hardware and software errors that can occur during PC operation.  
5-1 Initial System Checks and Test Run Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-1-1 Initial System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-1-2 CPM1A Test Run Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-1-3 Flash Memory Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-2 The CPM1A Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3 Self-diagnosis Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3-1 Non-fatal Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3-2 Fatal Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3-3 Identifying Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-3-4 User-defined Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-4 Programming Console Operation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-5 Programming Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-6 Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-7 Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5-8 Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
110  
110  
110  
111  
112  
113  
113  
113  
114  
114  
115  
115  
117  
125  
126  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial System Checks and Test Run Procedure  
Section 5-1  
5-1 Initial System Checks and Test Run Procedure  
5-1-1 Initial System Checks  
Note Check the following items after setting up and wiring the CPM1A. Be sure to  
check the wiring and connections before performing a test run.  
Item  
Points to check  
Power supply and  
I/O connections  
Is the wiring correct?  
Are the terminals securely tightened?  
Are there any shorts between crimp connectors or wires?  
Refer to 3-4 Wiring and Connections for details.  
Are the cables all connected correctly and locked?  
Refer to 3-4 Wiring and Connections for details.  
Has the dustproof label been removed?  
Connecting cables  
Dustproof label  
Note 1. Always clear memory before beginning to program the CPM1A. Although  
memory is cleared before the CPU Unit is shipped (except for bits with spe-  
cific functions), AR 1314, which turns ON when the internal capacitor cannot  
back up memory, may have turned ON during shipment.  
2. If the CPM1A will be turned off for periods exceeding the data backup period  
of the internal capacitor, design the system so that it will not be influenced if  
data in the DM, HR, and CNT areas is cleared when power is turned off.  
3. Either switch the CPM1A to RUN or MONITOR mode, or turn off and on  
power to the CPM1A after changing from a Programming Device any data  
that is backed up in flash memory. This data includes the user program,  
read-only DM area (DM 6144 to DM 6599), and the PC Setup (DM 6600 to  
DM 6655).  
5-1-2 CPM1A Test Run Procedure  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Power Supply Application  
a) Check the CPM1As power supply voltage and terminal connections.  
b) Check the I/O devicespower supply voltage and terminal connections.  
c) Turn on the power supply and check that the PWRindicator lights.  
d) Use a Peripheral Device to set the CPM1A to PROGRAM mode.  
2. I/O Wiring Checks  
a) With the CPM1A in PROGRAM mode, check the output wiring by turning  
on the output bits with the force set and force reset operations.  
Refer to 4-3-23 Force Set, Reset for details.  
b) Check the input wiring with the CPM1As input indicators or a Peripheral  
Devices monitor operations.  
3. Test Run  
a) Use a Peripheral Device to set the CPM1A to RUN or MONITOR mode  
and check that the RUNindicator lights.  
b) Check the sequence of operation with the force set/reset operations, etc.  
4. Debugging  
Correct any programming errors that are detected.  
5. Saving the Program  
a) Use a Peripheral Device to write the program to a backup floppy disk.  
b) Print out a hard copy of the program with a printer.  
Note Refer to Section 4 Using Peripheral Devices for details on SYSMAC Support  
Software or Programming Console operations.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial System Checks and Test Run Procedure  
Section 5-1  
5-1-3 Flash Memory Precautions  
Observe the following precautions to protect the flash memory and ensure  
proper operation.  
1, 2, 3...  
1. If the power is turned off without changing the mode after having made chan-  
ges in the read-only DM area (DM 6144 through DM 6599), or PC Setup (DM  
6600 through DM 6655), the contents of changes will not be written to flash  
memory. Therefore, if the power is turned off for more than 20 days (at  
25_ C), contents of changes (contents of the RAM) will disappear and the  
data values will become undefined values. For details, refer to 2-1-2 Char-  
acteristics.  
The changes can be saved by switching the CPM1A to RUN or MONITOR  
mode or turning on the CPM1A soon after the changes are made.  
2. When the CPM1A is operated for the first time after changing the program,  
the read-only DM area (DM 6144 through DM 6599) or PC Setup (DM 6600  
through DM 6655) will take about 600 ms longer than usual. Be sure to take  
this one-time startup delay into account.  
3. If one of the following three operations is performed in MONITOR or RUN  
mode, the CPM1A will extend the cycle time for up to 600 ms and interrupts  
will be disabled while the program or PC Setup is being overwritten.  
Program changes with the online edit operation  
Changes to the read-only DM area (DM 6144 through DM 6599)  
Changes to the PC Setup (DM 6600 through DM 6655)  
A SCAN TIME OVERerror wont occur during these operations. The  
CPM1As I/O response times may be affected when the online edit operation  
is being performed.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The CPM1A Cycle  
Section 5-2  
5-2 The CPM1A Cycle  
The overall flow of CPM1A operation is as shown in the following flowchart. The  
CPM1A is initialized internally when the power is turned on. If no errors are  
detected, the overseeing processes, program execution, I/O refreshing, and  
Peripheral Device servicing are executed consecutively (cyclically). The aver-  
age cycle time can be monitor from a Peripheral Device.  
Power application  
Initialization processes  
Initialization  
Check hardware and  
Program Memory.  
No  
Check OK?  
Overseeing  
processes  
Yes  
Set error flags and  
activate indicators.  
Preset cycle time  
monitoring time.  
ALARM  
(flashing)  
Execute user program.  
End of program?  
ERROR or ALARM?  
No  
Program  
ERROR  
(lit)  
execution  
Yes  
Check cycle time set-  
ting.  
Cycle  
time  
Minimum  
cycle time set?  
No  
Cycle time  
processing  
Yes  
Wait until minimum cycle  
time expires.  
Compute cycle time.  
Refresh input bits and  
output terminals.  
I/O refreshing  
Service  
peripheral  
port.  
Service peripheral port.  
Note Initialization processes include clearing the IR, SR, and AR areas, presetting  
system timers, and checking I/O Units.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Self-diagnosis Functions  
Section 5-3  
5-3 Self-diagnosis Functions  
The CPM1A is equipped with a variety of self-diagnosis functions to help identify  
and correct errors that might occur and reduce down time.  
PC errors are divided into 2 categories based on the severity of the errors. Fatal  
errors are more serious errors which stop CPM1A operation. Non-fatal errors  
are less serious and dont stop CPM1A operation.  
5-3-1 Non-fatal Errors  
PC operation and program execution will continue after one or more of these  
errors have occurred. Although PC operation will continue, the cause of the error  
should be corrected and the error cleared as soon as possible.  
When one of these errors occurs, the POWER and RUN indicators will remain lit  
and the ERR/ALM indicator will flash.  
Message  
FAL No.  
Meaning and appropriate response  
SYS FAIL FAL**  
01 to 99 An FAL(06) instruction has been executed in the program. Check the FAL number to  
(** is 01 to 99 or 9B.)  
determine conditions that would cause execution, correct the cause, and clear the  
error.  
9B  
An error has been detected in the PC Setup. Check flags AR 1300 to AR 1302, and  
correct as directed.  
AR 1300 ON: An incorrect setting was detected in the PC Setup (DM 6600 to  
DM 6614) when power was turned on. Correct the settings in PROGRAM Mode and  
turn on the power again.  
AR 1301 ON: An incorrect setting was detected in the PC Setup (DM 6615 to  
DM 6644) when switching to RUN Mode. Correct the settings in PROGRAM Mode  
and switch to RUN Mode again.  
AR 1302 ON: An incorrect setting was detected in the PC Setup (DM 6645 to  
DM 6655) during operation. Correct the settings and clear the error.  
SCAN TIME OVER  
F8  
Watchdog timer has exceeded 100 ms. (SR 25309 will be ON.)  
This indicates that the program cycle time is longer than recommended. Reduce cycle  
time if possible. (The CPM1A can be set so that this error wont be detected.)  
Communication  
Errors (no message)  
None  
If an error occurs in communications through the peripheral port, the COMM indicator  
will be off. Check the connecting cables and restart. Check the error flags in AR 0812  
ON.  
5-3-2 Fatal Errors  
PC operation and program execution will stop and all outputs from the PC will be  
turned OFF when any of these errors have occurred. CPM1A operation cant be  
restarted until the PC is turned off and then on again or a Peripheral Device is  
used to switch the PC to PROGRAM mode and clear the fatal error.  
All CPU Unit indicators will be OFF for the power interruption error. For all other  
fatal operating errors, the POWER and ERR/ALM indicators will be lit. The RUN  
indicator will be OFF.  
WARNING The PC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects any  
error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed. External  
safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system. Not providing  
proper safety measures may result in serious accidents.  
!
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Self-diagnosis Functions  
Section 5-3  
Message  
FALS  
No.  
Meaning and appropriate response  
Power interruption  
(no message)  
None  
Power has been interrupted for at least 10 ms (2 ms for DC power types.) Check  
power supply voltage and power lines. Try to power-up again.  
MEMORY ERR  
F1  
AR 1308 ON: An unspecified bit area exists in the user program. Check the program  
and correct errors.  
AR 1309 ON: An error has occurred in reading or writing flash memory. Replace the  
CPU Unit.  
AR 1310 ON: A checksum error has occurred in read-only DM (DM 6144 to DM 6599).  
Check and correct the settings in the read-only DM area.  
AR 1311 ON: A checksum error has occurred in the PC Setup. Initialize all of the PC  
Setup and reinput.  
AR 1312 ON: A checksum error has occurred in the program. Check the program and  
correct any errors detected.  
AR 1314 ON: The internal capacitor can no longer back up data. Clear the error and  
check/correct the contents of the data areas backed up by the capacitor.  
NO END INST  
I/O BUS ERR  
F0  
C0  
END(01) is not written in the program. Write END(01) at the end of the program.  
An error has occurred during data transfer between the CPU Unit and Expansion I/O  
Unit. Check the Expansion I/O Units connecting cable.  
I/O UNIT OVER  
E1  
Too many I/O Units have been connected. Check the I/O Unit configuration.  
SYS FAIL FALS**  
(** is 01 to 99 or 9F.)  
01 to 99 A FALS(07) instruction has been executed in the program. Check the FALS number to  
determine the conditions that caused execution, correct the cause, and clear the error.  
9F  
The cycle time has exceeded the FALS 9F Cycle Time Monitoring Time (DM 6618).  
Check the cycle time and adjust the Cycle Time Monitoring Time if necessary.  
5-3-3 Identifying Errors  
PC errors can be identified from error messages displayed on the Programming  
Console, error flags in the SR or AR areas, and the error code in SR 25300 to  
SR 25307.  
Error Messages  
Error Flags  
Error messages generated by the self-diagnosis function can be read from a  
Programming Console or host computer running SYSMAC Support Software.  
When the self-diagnosis function detects a hardware error, it will turn on the cor-  
responding error flags in the SR and AR areas.  
Error Code  
When an error is detected by the self-diagnosis function, the corresponding  
error code is written to SR 25300 to SR 25307. (The error code is an 2-digit hex-  
adecimal code.)  
5-3-4 User-defined Errors  
There are three instructions that the user can use to define his own errors or  
messages. FAL(06) causes a non-fatal error, FAL(07) causes a fatal error, and  
MSG(46) sends a message to the Programming Console or host computer con-  
nected to the PC.  
FAILURE ALARM FAL(06) FAL(06) is an instruction that causes a non-fatal error. The following will occur  
when an FAL(06) instruction is executed:  
1, 2, 3...  
1. The ERR/ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will flash. PC operation will con-  
tinue.  
2. The instructions 2-digit BCD FAL number (01 to 99) will be written to  
SR 25300 to SR 25307.  
The FAL numbers can be set arbitrarily to indicate particular conditions. The  
same number cannot be used as both an FAL number and an FALS number.  
To clear an FAL error, correct the cause of the error and then execute FAL 00 or  
clear the error using the Programming Console.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Errors  
Section 5-5  
SEVERE FAILURE ALARM FALS(07) is an instruction that causes a fatal error. The following will occur when  
FALS(07)  
an FALS(07) instruction is executed:  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Program execution will be stopped and outputs will be turned OFF.  
2. The ERR/ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will be lit.  
3. The instructions 2-digit BCD FALS number (01 to 99) will be written to  
SR 25300 to SR 25307.  
4. The FALS number and time of occurrence will be recorded in the PCs error  
log area if a Memory Cassette with a clock (RTC) is used.  
The FALS numbers can be set arbitrarily to indicate particular conditions. The  
same number cannot be used as both an FAL number and an FALS number.  
To clear an FALS error, switch the PC to PROGRAM Mode, correct the cause of  
the error, and then clear the error using the Programming Console.  
MESSAGE MSG(46)  
MSG(46) is used to display a message on the Programming Console. The mes-  
sage, which can be up to 16 characters long, is displayed when the instructions  
execution condition is ON.  
5-4 Programming Console Operation Errors  
The following error messages may appear when performing operations on the  
Programming Console. Correct the error as indicated and continue with the  
operation. Refer to the SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manuals: Basics  
and C-series PCs for errors that may appear when operating the SSS.  
Message  
Meaning and appropriate response  
REPL ROM  
An attempt was made to write to write-protected memory. Set bits  
00 to 03 of DM 6602 to 0.”  
PROG OVER The instruction at the last address in memory is not NOP(00). Erase  
all unnecessary instructions at the end of the program.  
ADDR OVER An address was set that is larger than the highest memory address  
in Program Memory. Input a smaller address.  
SETDATA  
ERR  
FALS 00 has been input, and 00cannot be input. Reinput the  
data.  
I/O NO. ERR A data area address has been designated that exceeds the limit of  
the data area, e.g., an address is too large. Confirm the  
requirements for the instruction and re-enter the address.  
5-5 Programming Errors  
These errors in program syntax will be detected when the program is checked  
using the Program Check operation.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Errors  
Section 5-5  
Three levels of program checking are available. The desired level must be des-  
ignated to indicate the type of errors that are to be detected. The following table  
provides the error types, displays, and explanations of all syntax errors. Check  
level 0 checks for type A, B, and C errors; check level 1, for type A and B errors;  
and check level 2, for type A errors only.  
Type  
Message  
?????  
Meaning and appropriate response  
A
The program has been damaged, creating a non-existent  
function code. Re-enter the program.  
CIRCUIT ERR  
The number of logic blocks and logic block instructions  
does not agree, i.e., either LD or LD NOT has been used  
to start a logic block whose execution condition has not  
been used by another instruction, or a logic block  
instruction has been used that does not have the required  
number of logic blocks. Check your program.  
OPERAND  
ERR  
A constant entered for the instruction is not within defined  
values. Change the constant so that it lies within the  
proper range.  
NO END  
INSTR  
There is no END(01) in the program. Write END(01) at the  
final address in the program.  
LOCN ERR  
An instruction is in the wrong place in the program. Check  
instruction requirements and correct the program.  
JME UNDEFD  
A JME(05) instruction is missing for a JMP(04) instruction.  
Correct the jump number or insert the proper JME(05)  
instruction.  
DUPL  
The same jump number or subroutine number has been  
used twice. Correct the program so that the same number  
is only used once for each.  
SBN UNDEFD  
STEP ERR  
The SBS(91) instruction has been programmed for a  
subroutine number that does not exist. Correct the  
subroutine number or program the required subroutine.  
STEP(08) with a section number and STEP(08) without a  
section number have been used incorrectly. Check  
STEP(08) programming requirements and correct the  
program.  
B
IL-ILC ERR  
IL(02) and ILC(03) are not used in pairs. Correct the  
program so that each IL(02) has a unique ILC(03).  
Although this error message will appear if more than one  
IL(02) is used with the same ILC(03), the program will  
executed as written. Make sure your program is written as  
desired before proceeding.  
JMP-JME ERR JMP(04) and JME(05) are not used in pairs. Make sure  
your program is written as desired before proceeding.  
SBN-RET ERR If the displayed address is that of SBN(92), two different  
subroutines have been defined with the same subroutine  
number. Change one of the subroutine numbers or delete  
one of the subroutines. If the displayed address is that of  
RET(93), RET(93) has not been used properly. Check  
requirements for RET(93) and correct the program.  
C
COIL DUPL  
The same bit is being controlled (i.e., turned ON and/or  
OFF) by more than one instruction (e.g., OUT, OUT NOT,  
DIFU(13), DIFD(14), KEEP(11), SFT(10)). Although this is  
allowed for certain instructions, check instruction  
requirements to confirm that the program is correct or  
rewrite the program so that each bit is controlled by only  
one instruction.  
JMP UNDEFD  
SBS UNDEFD  
JME(05) has been used with no JMP(04) with the same  
jump number. Add a JMP(04) with the same number or  
delete the JME(05) that is not being used.  
A subroutine exists that is not called by SBS(91). Program  
a subroutine call in the proper place, or delete the  
subroutine if it is not required.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Flowcharts  
Section 5-6  
5-6 Troubleshooting Flowcharts  
Use the following flowcharts to troubleshoot errors that occur during operation.  
Main Check  
Error  
No  
PWR indicator lit?  
Yes  
Check power supply. (See page 118.)  
No  
Operation stopped. Check for fatal errors.  
(See page 119.)  
RUN indicator lit?  
Yes  
No  
No  
ERR/ALM indicator  
flashing?  
Check for non-fatal errors. (See page 120.)  
Check I/O. (See page 121.)  
Yes  
Is I/O sequence  
normal?  
Yes  
No  
Operating  
environment nor-  
mal?  
Check operating environment. (See page 123.)  
Yes  
Replace the CPU  
Unit.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Flowcharts  
Section 5-6  
Power Supply Check  
PWR indicator not lit.  
No  
Connect power  
supply.  
Is power being  
supplied?  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Is PWR indicator lit?  
No  
Set supply voltage  
within acceptable limits.  
Is voltage adequate?  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Is PWR indicator lit?  
Tighten screws or  
replace wires.  
Are there any loose  
terminal screws or bro-  
ken wires?  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Is PWR indicator lit?  
Correct the short circuit or limit  
the connected load to the spec-  
ification range  
Has the external  
power supply shorted  
or overloaded?  
(see note)  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Is PWR indicator lit?  
End  
Replace the CPU  
Unit.  
Note The PWR indicator will go out when there is a short circuit in the external power  
supply or an overload, only in the CPM1A-10CDR-j and CPM1A-20CDR-  
CPU Units. In CPM1A-30CDR-j and CPM1A-40CDR- CPU Units, when  
j
j
there is a short circuit or a overload, the external power supply voltage will drop  
but the PWR indicator will remain lit.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Flowcharts  
Section 5-6  
Fatal Error Check  
RUN indicator not lit.  
No  
Is the ERR/ALM  
indicator lit?  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Determine the cause  
of the error with a  
Peripheral Device.  
Is PC mode displayed  
on Peripheral Device?  
No  
Is PC mode displayed  
on Peripheral Device?  
Turn the power  
supply OFF, and  
then ON again.  
Yes  
Yes  
Is a fatal error  
displayed?  
Identify the error, eliminate  
its cause, and clear the  
error.  
Follow the Memory Error  
Check flowchart if a  
No  
memory error has occurred.  
Switch to RUN or  
MONITOR mode.  
No  
Is the RUN indi-  
cator lit?  
Yes  
End  
Replace the CPU  
Unit.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Flowcharts  
Section 5-6  
Non-fatal Error Check  
ERR/ALM indicator flashing.  
Determine the cause of the error  
with a Peripheral Device.  
Yes  
Identify the error, eliminate its  
cause, and clear the error.  
Is a non-fatal error  
indicated?  
No  
Flashing  
Is the ERR/ALM indi-  
cator flashing?  
Not lit  
End  
Replace the CPU  
Unit.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Flowcharts  
Section 5-6  
I/O Check  
The I/O check flowchart is based on the following ladder diagram section.  
(LS1)  
(LS2)  
00002  
00003  
01003  
SOL1  
01003  
SOL1 malfunction.  
Malfunction of SOL1  
No  
Is the IR 01003 out-  
put indicator operat-  
ing normally?  
Yes  
Check the voltage at the  
IR 01003 terminals.  
Wire correctly.  
Monitor the ON/OFF  
Correct the short cir-  
cuit or limit the con-  
nected load to the  
specification range  
status of IR 01003  
with a Peripheral  
Device.  
No  
No  
No A  
Operation  
O.K.?  
Is output wiring  
correct?  
Operation  
O.K.?  
To  
next  
page  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Has the external  
power supply shorted  
or overloaded?  
Yes  
Disconnect the external wires  
and check the conductivity of  
each wire.  
Yes  
No  
Operation  
O.K.?  
Replace the CPU Unit  
or Expansion I/O Unit  
with the problem.  
Check output device  
SOL1.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Flowcharts  
Section 5-6  
No  
Are the IR 00002  
and IR 00003 input indi-  
cators operating  
A
normally?  
From  
Yes  
previous  
page  
Check the voltage at  
the IR 00002 and IR  
00003 terminals.  
Check the voltage at  
the IR 00002 and IR  
00003 terminals.  
Are the terminal  
screws loose?  
Yes  
No  
Operation  
O.K.?  
No  
Yes  
Operation  
O.K.?  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Is input wiring  
correct?  
No  
Check operation by using a  
dummy input signal to turn the  
input ON and OFF.  
Wire correctly.  
Tighten the terminal  
screws  
No  
Operation  
O.K.?  
Yes  
Replace the CPU  
Unit or Expansion  
I/O Unit.  
Replace the CPU  
Unit or Expansion  
I/O Unit.  
Return to start.”  
Check input devices  
LS1 and LS2.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Flowcharts  
Section 5-6  
Environmental Conditions Check  
Environmental conditions check  
No  
Is the ambient  
temperature  
below 55°C?  
Consider using a  
fan or cooler.  
Yes  
Is the ambient  
temperature above  
0°C?  
No  
No  
Consider using a  
heater.  
Yes  
Is the ambient humidity  
between 10% and  
90%?  
Consider using an  
air conditioner.  
Yes  
Install surge pro-  
tectors or other  
noise-reducing  
equipment at  
No  
No  
Is noise being  
controlled?  
noise sources.  
Yes  
Consider  
constructing an  
instrument panel  
or cabinet.  
Is the installation envi-  
ronment okay?  
Yes  
End.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Flowcharts  
Section 5-6  
Memory Error Check  
Memory error occurred.  
Yes  
Replace the CPU  
Unit.  
AR 1309 ON?  
No  
Yes  
Check/correct data backed up by  
capacitor and clear error.  
AR 1314 ON?  
No  
Check the program, correct any  
errors, and clear the error.  
Yes  
AR 1308 ON?  
No  
No  
Check the error indicated by  
Yes  
Yes  
AR 1310 to  
AR 1312 ON?  
Turned ON during  
the flag that is ON, correct set-  
tings as required, and write  
data to the flash memory.  
startup?  
No  
No  
Check the external  
environment.  
End  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance Inspections  
Section 5-7  
5-7 Maintenance Inspections  
In order that your SYSMAC system operates in optimum condition, be sure to  
carry out daily or periodical inspections.  
Inspection Items  
The main system components of a SYSMAC system are semiconductors, and it  
contains few components with limited lifetimes. Environmental conditions, how-  
ever, can lead to electrical element deterioration, making regular maintenance  
necessary.  
The standard period for maintenance checks is 6 months to 1 year, but depend-  
ing on the environment checks may need to be more regular.  
If the criteria are not met, adjust to within the specified ranges.  
Inspection items  
Details  
Criteria  
Remarks  
Power supply  
Determine whether the  
voltage fluctuation is within range (see note)  
the standard at the power  
Within the voltage variation Tester  
supply terminal.  
Environmental conditions  
Is the ambient temperature  
inside the panel  
Thermometer  
0 to 55_ C  
appropriate?  
Is the ambient humidity  
inside the panel  
appropriate?  
10% to 90% RH with no  
condensation  
Hydroscope  
Has dirt or dust collected?  
None  
Visual inspection  
Tester  
I/O power supply  
Installation status  
Is the voltage fluctuation  
measured at the I/O  
terminal within the standard  
range?  
Each I/O must conform to  
the specifications  
Are all units securely  
installed?  
Nothing is loose  
Nothing is loose  
Positive screwdriver  
Visual inspection  
Are all connection cables  
and connectors inserted  
completely and locked?  
Are any of the external  
wiring screws loose?  
Nothing is loose  
Positive screwdriver  
Visual inspection  
Are any of the external  
wiring cables frayed?  
No external abnormalities  
Product service life  
Contact output relay  
Electrical:  
Resistance load: 300,000  
operations  
Inductive load: 100,000  
operations  
Mechanical:  
10,000,000 operations  
Note Power supply voltage variation range.  
Power supply  
100 to 120 VAC  
200 to 240 VAC  
24 VDC  
Allowable voltage fluctuation range  
85 to 132 VAC  
170 to 264 VAC  
20.4 to 26.4 VDC  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling Precautions  
Section 5-8  
5-8 Handling Precautions  
Turn the power OFF before replacing the Unit.  
Note Before restarting operation, transfer the contents of the DM and HR areas to the  
CPU Unit that was changed and then start operation.  
If a Unit is found to be faulty and is replaced, check the Unit again to ensure  
there is no error.  
When returning a faulty Unit for repair, make a detailed note of the Units mal-  
function and take it together with the Unit to your nearest OMRON office or  
sales representative.  
If a contact is not good, put some industrial alcohol on a clean cotton cloth and  
wipe the surface. After doing this, install the Unit.  
Necessary Tools for  
Inspection  
Standard Tools  
Screwdrivers (Philips and flat-blade)  
Voltage tester or digital voltage meter  
Industrial alcohol and a cotton cloth  
Measurement Devices  
Synchroscope  
Cathode-ray oscilloscope  
Thermometer, hydroscope  
Note Do not take apart, repair or remodel the PC in any way.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECTION 6  
Expansion Memory Unit  
This section describes how to use the CPM1-EMU01-V1 Expansion Memory Unit. Follow the handling precautions and pro-  
cedures to properly use the Unit.  
6-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-1-1 Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-1-2 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-2 Specifications and Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-2-1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-2-2 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-3 Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-3-1 Mounting/Removing EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-3-2 PC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-3-3 Uploading Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
6-3-4 Downloading Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
128  
128  
128  
129  
129  
129  
130  
130  
131  
132  
133  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling  
Section 6-3  
6-1 Overview  
The CPM1-EMU01-V1 Expansion Memory Unit is a program loader for small-  
size or micro PCs. Using the CPM1-EMU01-V1, simple on-site transfer of user  
programs and data memory between PCs is possible.  
Uploading  
Download-  
ing  
EEPROM  
SYSMAC  
CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C,  
CQM1, CQM1H, SRM1(-V2)  
Expansion Memory Unit  
Note The PLCin the DOWNLOAD TO PLCButton indicates PCs (Programmable  
Controllers).  
6-1-1 Memory Areas  
The memory areas that are uploaded or downloaded vary with the button used  
as shown in the following table.  
Button  
UPLOAD + DM  
UPLOAD  
DOWNLOAD TO  
PLC  
Read from PC to  
EEPROM.  
All contents of  
EEPROM written  
to PC.  
Ladder program  
and expansion  
instructions  
Read from PC to  
EEPROM.  
DM 6144 to 6655  
Not affected.  
Note For details on program size, DM area, and the availability of expansion instruc-  
tions, refer to the relevant PC manual.  
6-1-2 Precautions  
Do not attempt to use the CPM1-EMU01-V1 for any applications other than  
those described here. Doing so may result in malfunction.  
Do not attempt to upload or download data between different types of PC. Do-  
ing so may result in malfunction.  
Do not download when the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode. If downloading is  
performed when the PC is running, it will automatically switch to PROGRAM  
mode and operation will stop.  
Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify the CPM1-EMU01-V1. Any  
attempt to do so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.  
After downloading has been completed, be sure to confirm the user program,  
data, and expansion instruction information. Not doing so may result in faulty  
operation.  
Before touching the EEPROM or the CPM1-EMU01-V1, first touch a grounded  
metallic object to discharge any static build-up. Not doing so may result in mal-  
function or damage.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling  
Section 6-3  
6-2 Specifications and Nomenclature  
6-2-1 Specifications  
Item  
Specifications  
Supported PCs  
CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, SRM1 (-V2),  
CQM1, CQM1H  
Read/Write memory areas  
User program: 15.2 Kwords max.  
Data memory: DM 6144 to DM 6655  
(Read-only DM and PC Setup)  
Expansion instructions: 18 instructions  
Connector  
Connector compatible with CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A,  
SRM1 (-V2), and CQM1 PCs.  
For CPM2C and CQM1H PCs, connect via  
CS1W-CN114 or CPM2C-CN111 Connecting Cable.  
Communications setting  
EEPROM (See note 1.)  
1 start bit, 7 data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits,  
9,600 bps  
256-Kbit EEPROM  
ATMEL: AT28C256  
OMRON: EEROM-JD  
Current consumption  
Dimensions  
129 mA max.  
Main body (not including cables or connectors):  
57 × 92 × 38 mm (W × H × D)  
Weight  
200 g max. (not including EEPROM)  
Note 1. The EEPROM must be purchased separately.  
2. For general specifications, refer to the relevant PC manual.  
6-2-2 Nomenclature  
Peripheral Port  
Connector  
Lock Lever  
EEPROM Socket  
Lock Lever  
For mounting and removing EEPROM.  
DOWNLOAD TO PLC Button  
Writes all EEPROM data (ladder programs,  
data memory etc.) to the PC.  
UPLOAD + DM Button  
Reads PC user program and contents of  
DM 6144 to DM 6655 to EEPROM.  
UPLOAD Button  
Indicator  
UPLOAD + DM Button  
DOWNLOAD to PLC Button  
UPLOAD Button  
Reads only PC user program to EEPROM.  
Note The PLCin the DOWNLOAD TO PLCButton indicates PCs (Programmable  
Controllers).  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling  
Section 6-3  
LED Indicator  
CONNECT  
(green)  
ERR (red)  
OFF  
Meaning  
OFF  
ON  
Not connected to PC (power supply OFF).  
Connected to a recognized PC.  
OFF  
Blinking  
ON  
OFF  
Uploading/downloading data.  
Blinking  
ON  
Host link communications error, retry by user.  
PC model and EEPROM data not compatible.  
OFF  
OFF  
Blinking  
One of the following errors has occurred:  
An unrecognized PC is connected.  
An EEPROM error (EEPROM not present, EEPROM  
defect, or no program to download) or checksum  
error.  
6-3 Handling  
6-3-1 Mounting/Removing EEPROM  
Caution Do not mount or remove the EEPROM with the CPM1-EMU01-V1 connected to  
!
the PC. Doing so may damage the EEPROM.  
Mounting EEPROM  
1, 2, 3...  
1. Lift up the lock lever.  
2. Straighten the pins on the EEPROM, line up with the socket and lower into  
the socket, as shown in the following diagram. If the EEPROM is loose,  
place it in the center of the socket.  
Lift up the lock lever.  
EEPROM  
Insert the EEPROM.  
3. Gently hold down the EEPROM and pull down the lock lever.  
Pull down the lock lever.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling  
Section 6-3  
Removing EEPROM  
Lift up the lock lever and detach the EEPROM.  
6-3-2 PC Connections  
Caution Mount the EEPROM to the CPM1-EMU01-V1 before connecting the  
!
!
CPM1-EMU01-V1 to the PC.  
Caution Do not disconnect the CPM1-EMU01-V1 from the PC when the indicator is blink-  
ing green.  
CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A,  
CQM1, and SRM1 (-V2)  
PCs  
When connecting to the CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CQM1 or SRM1 (-V2),insert  
the connector into the peripheral port making sure that the connector is oriented  
correctly.  
Insert the connector until it securely locks into place.  
Connections are not possible to the RS-232C port or any other port.  
Connection to CPM2A  
CPM2C and CQM1H PCs  
When connecting to the CPM2C or CQM1H, connect to the peripheral port via  
the CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114 Connecting Cable. Also, set the pins on  
the CPU Units DIP switch as follows:  
Pin 1: ON (see note)  
Pin 2: ON  
CPM2C  
CQM1H  
Pin 5: ON (see note)  
Pin 7: ON  
Note If pin 1 on the CPM2C or pin 5 on the CQM1H is OFF, connection is still possible if  
the peripheral port is set to the defaults.  
Peripheral Port  
Communications  
Settings  
The peripheral port must be set to the default communications settings shown  
below.  
Start bit: 1  
Data bits: 7  
Stop bits: 2  
Parity: Even  
Baud rate: 9,600 bps  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling  
Section 6-3  
Disconnecting  
Press the levers on the top and bottom of the connector inwards to unlock the  
connector and pull out as shown in the following diagram.  
Note Do not attempt to remove the connector by pulling the cable.  
6-3-3 Uploading Programs  
Ladder programs and the contents of data memory can be uploaded to the  
EEPROM using the following procedure. The buttons used will determine  
whether the contents of data memory are uploaded or not.  
Expansion Memory Unit  
SYSMAC PC  
Indicator  
UPLOAD+DM Button  
UPLOAD Button  
Button  
UPLOAD + DM  
UPLOAD  
Read from PC to  
EEPROM.  
Ladder program and  
expansion instructions  
Read from PC to  
EEPROM.  
DM6144 to 6655  
Not affected.  
Note Use a Phillips screwdriver or other tool with a diameter of 3.0 mm max. and a  
blade length of 10 mm min. to press the upload button.  
3.0 dia. max.  
10 mm min.  
Uploading is possible even if the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling  
Section 6-3  
Operation Procedure  
Start  
Mount the EEPROM to the  
CPM1-EMU01-V1.  
Mount the EEPROM to the CPM1-EMU01-V1  
before connecting to the PC.  
Connect the CPM1-EMU01-V1 to the  
PCs peripheral port.  
Check the orientation of the connector  
before connecting the CPM1-EMU01-V1.  
After 2 or 3 s, check if the indicator is  
lit green.  
Note If the indicator is not lit at all, lit red or  
blinks red, uploading will not be pos-  
sible. In this case, check the follow-  
ing items.  
See the note  
on the right.  
No  
Yes  
Is the connector properly con-  
nected?  
Select the memory area to be uploaded.  
Is the EEPROM properly mounted?  
Are the EEPROM specifications cor-  
rect?  
Are the peripheral port communica-  
tions settings correct?  
Upload both the ladder  
program and DM 6144 to  
DM 6655.  
Upload only the ladder  
program.  
Press the UPLOAD+DM  
Button.  
Press the UPLOAD But-  
ton.  
Check if the indicator is blinking green  
(indicating that uploading has started).  
See the note above.  
No  
Yes  
Check if the indicator is lit green (in-  
dicating that uploading has been suc-  
cessfully completed).  
See the note above.  
No  
Yes  
Remove the Expansion Memory Unit  
from the PC.  
End  
6-3-4 Downloading Programs  
Ladder programs and the contents of data memory can be downloaded from the  
EEPROM to the PC using the procedure given below. When downloading, note  
the following points.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling  
Section 6-3  
Caution If the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode when downloading is started, it will auto-  
matically switch to PROGRAM mode and operation will stop. Confirm that no  
adverse effects will occur to the system before downloading. Not doing so may  
result in unexpected operation.  
!
Note 1. If the PC is in RUN or MONITOR mode, switch the PC mode to PROGRAM  
mode.  
2. Confirm that the program or other data to be downloaded to the PC is com-  
patible with the PC before downloading.  
3. For the CQM1 or CQM1H, when downloading programs that use user-as-  
signed function codes for expansion instructions, be sure that pin 4 on the  
CPU Units DIP switch is ON. If these programs are downloaded while the  
pin is OFF, the assignments for the expansion instructions will return to their  
default settings.  
4. After downloading has been completed, be sure to confirm the user pro-  
gram, data, and expansion instructions.  
5. When the DOWNLOAD TO PLC Button is pressed, all EEPROM data (lad-  
der programs, data memory etc.) is written to the PC.  
Expansion Memory Unit  
SYSMAC PC  
DOWNLOAD TO PLC Button  
Indicator  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Handling  
Section 6-3  
Operation Procedure  
Start  
Mount the EEPROM to the  
CPM1-EMU01-V1.  
Mount the EEPROM to the  
CPM1-EMU01-V1 before downloading.  
Change the mode of the PC to PRO-  
GRAM mode.  
Confirm the safety of the system.  
Connect the CPM1-EMU01-V1 to the  
PCs peripheral port.  
Confirm the orientation of the connector  
before connecting the CPM1-EMU01-V1.  
After 2 or 3 s, check if the indicator is  
lit green.  
Note If the indicator is not lit at all, lit red or  
blinks red, downloading will not be  
possible. In this case, check the fol-  
lowing items.  
See the note on  
the right.  
No  
Yes  
Is the connector properly con-  
nected?  
Press the DOWNLOAD TO PLC But-  
ton.  
Is the EEPROM properly mounted?  
Are the EEPROM specifications cor-  
rect?  
Check if the indicator is blinking  
green (indicating that downloading  
has started).  
Are the peripheral port communica-  
tions settings correct?  
See the note above.  
See the note above.  
No  
Yes  
Check if the indicator is lit green  
(indicating that downloading has  
been successfully completed).  
No  
Yes  
Remove the Expansion Memory Unit  
from the PC.  
Before actual operation, check the contents  
of the ladder program and the DM area, as  
well as the expansion instruction settings.  
Check the program.  
End  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A  
Standard Models  
CPU Units  
Model number  
Transistor output  
Sink type Source type  
--- ---  
Description  
Input  
points  
Output  
points  
Power  
supply  
Relay output  
CPU Units with  
10 I/O points  
6 points  
4 points  
AC  
CPM1A-  
10CDR-A  
DC  
AC  
DC  
AC  
DC  
AC  
DC  
CPM1A-  
10CDR-D  
CPM1A-  
10CDT-D  
CPM1A-  
10CDT1-D  
CPU Units with  
20 I/O points  
12 points 8 points  
18 points 12 points  
24 points 16 points  
CPM1A-  
20CDR-A  
---  
---  
CPM1A-  
20CDR-D  
CPM1A-  
20CDT-D  
CPM1A-  
20CDT1-D  
CPU Units with  
30 I/O points  
CPM1A-  
30CDR-A  
---  
---  
CPM1A-  
30CDR-D  
CPM1A-  
30CDT-D  
CPM1A-  
30CDT1-D  
CPU Units with  
40 I/O points  
CPM1A-  
40CDR-A  
---  
---  
CPM1A-  
40CDR-D  
CPM1A-  
40CDT-D  
CPM1A-  
40CDT1-D  
Expansion I/O Units  
Model number  
Description  
Input  
Output  
points points  
Relay output  
Transistor output  
Sinking  
Sourcing  
Expansion I/O Unit with 20 I/O points  
Expansion I/O Unit with 8 input points  
12  
points  
8 points CPM1A-20EDR  
CPM1A-20EDR1  
CPM1A-20EDT  
CPM1A-20EDT1  
8 points ---  
CPM1A-8ED (no outputs)  
Expansion I/O Unit with 8 output points ---  
8 points CPM1A-8ER  
CPM1A-8ET  
CPM1A-8ET1  
Expansion Units  
Analog I/O Unit  
Description  
Specifications  
Model number  
Analog I/O Unit  
2 analog inputs and 1 analog output  
CPM1A-MAD01  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Standard Models  
Appendix A  
Temperature Sensor Units  
Description  
Specifications  
2 thermocouple inputs: K, J  
Model number  
Temperature Sensor Unit  
CPM1A-TS001  
4 thermocouple inputs: K, J  
CPM1A-TS002  
CPM1A-TS101  
2 platinum resistance thermometer inputs:  
Pt100 (100 ), JPt100 (100 )  
4 platinum resistance thermometer inputs:  
CPM1A-TS102  
Pt100 (100 ), JPt100 (100 )  
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit  
Description  
Specifications  
Model number  
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit  
Operates as a CompoBus/S Slave and provides 8 CPM1A-SRT21  
inputs and 8 outputs to the CPM1A or CPM2A PC.  
Communications Adapters  
Description  
Output points  
Model number  
RS-232C Adapter  
Converts data communications between  
the peripheral port and RS-232C devices.  
CPM1-CIF01  
RS-422 Adapter  
Converts data communications between  
the peripheral port and RS-422 devices.  
CPM1-CIF11  
The CPM1-CIF01/CIF11 are used with the CPM1A, CPM1 and SRM1 only. Do not use them with a C200HS PC or  
other PC.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Standard Models  
AppendixA  
Peripheral Devices  
Name  
Appearance  
Model Number  
Specifications  
Programming Console  
CQM1-PRO01-E  
2-m Connecting Cable attached  
C200H-PRO27-E  
Hand-held, w/backlight; requires a  
C200H-CN222 or C200H-CN422  
Connecting Cable, see below.  
Connects the  
C200H-PRO27-E to  
a peripheral port.  
C200H-CN222  
C200H-CN422  
WS02-CXPC1-E  
2-m cable  
4-m cable  
CX-Programmer  
For MS-Windows 95/98 (CD-ROM)  
SYSMAC Support Software  
SYSMAC-CPT  
C500-ZL3AT1-E  
WS01-CPTB1-E  
CPM1-EMU01-V1  
3.5, 2HD for IBM PC/AT compatible  
For IBM PC/AT or compatible computers  
(3.5disks (2HD) and CDROM)  
Expansion Memory Unit  
Uploads the ladder program and DM 6144  
to DM 6655 from the PC to the EEPROM  
and downloads the ladder program and  
DM 6144 to DM 6655 from the EEPROM  
to the PC.  
EEPROM  
EEROM-JD  
256 K bit  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B  
Dimensions  
All dimensions are in millimeters.  
CPM1A-10CDR-j /10CDT-D/10CDT1-D CPU Unit  
CPU Unit with DC Power  
CPU Unit with AC Power  
66  
50  
85  
CPM1A-20CDR-j /20CDT-D/20CDT1-D CPU Unit  
CPU Unit with DC Power  
CPU Unit with AC Power  
86  
50  
85  
CPM1A-30CDR-j /30CDT-D/30CDT1-D CPU Unit  
CPU Unit with DC Power  
CPU Unit with AC Power  
130  
50  
85  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dimensions  
Appendix B  
CPM1A-40CDR-j /40CDT-D/40CDT1-D CPU Unit  
CPU Unit with DC Power  
CPU Unit with AC Power  
150  
50  
85  
CPM1A-20EDj Expansion I/O Unit  
Four, 4.5 dia.  
CPM1A-8j j j Expansion I/O Unit  
Four, 4.5 dia.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dimensions  
Appendix B  
CPM1A-MAD01 Analog I/O Unit  
Four, 4.5 dia.  
CPM1A-TSj j j Temperature Sensor Unit  
76±0.2  
Four, 4.5 dia.  
CPM1A-SRT21 CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit  
Four, 4.5 dia.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dimensions  
Appendix B  
CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter  
30  
21  
56  
50  
90 81  
205  
CPM1-CIF11 RS-422 Adapter  
30  
21  
61  
50  
90 81  
205  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dimensions  
Appendix B  
Dimensions with Peripheral Devices Attached  
Approx. 90  
Approx. 125  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
*DM  
Indirectly addressed DM area. See indirect address and DM area.  
A link created between two PCs to create common data in their LR areas.  
See add count input.  
1:1 PC Link  
ACP  
add count input  
An input signal used to increment a counter when the signal changes from OFF  
to ON.  
address  
AND  
A number used to identify the location of data or programming instructions in  
memory.  
A logic operation whereby the result is true if and only if both premises are true.  
In ladder-diagram programming the premises are usually ON/OFF states of bits  
or the logical combination of such states called execution conditions.  
area  
See data area and memory area.  
area prefix  
A one or two letter prefix used to identify a memory area in the PC. All memory  
areas except the IR and SR areas require prefixes to identify addresses in them.  
arithmetic shift  
ASCII  
A shift operation wherein the carry flag is included in the shift.  
Short for American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII is used to  
code characters for output to printers and other external devices.  
AR Area  
A PC data area allocated to flags and control bits.  
AUTOEXEC.BAT  
back-up  
An MS-DOS file containing commands automatically executed at startup.  
A copy made of existing data to ensure that the data will not be lost even if the  
original data is corrupted or erased.  
basic instruction  
baud rate  
A fundamental instruction used in a ladder diagram. See advanced instruction.  
The data transmission speed between two devices in a system measured in bits  
per second.  
BCD  
See binary-coded decimal.  
BCD calculation  
An arithmetic calculation that uses numbers expressed in binary-coded deci-  
mal.  
binary  
A number system where all numbers are expressed in base 2, i.e., numbers are  
written using only 0s and 1s. Each group of four binary bits is equivalent to one  
hexadecimal digit. Binary data in memory is thus often expressed in hexadeci-  
mal for convenience.  
binary calculation  
An arithmetic calculation that uses numbers expressed in binary.  
binary-coded decimal  
A system used to represent numbers so that every four binary bits is numerically  
equivalent to one decimal digit.  
bit  
The smallest piece of information that can be represented on a computer. A bit  
has the value of either zero or one, corresponding to the electrical signals ON  
and OFF. A bit represents one binary digit. Some bits at particular addresses are  
allocated to special purposes, such as holding the status of input from external  
devices, while other bits are available for general use in programming.  
bit address  
The location in memory where a bit of data is stored. A bit address specifies the  
data area and word that is being addressed as well as the number of the bit  
within the word.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
bit designator  
An operand that is used to designate the bit or bits of a word to be used by an  
instruction.  
bit number  
A number that indicates the location of a bit within a word. Bit 00 is the rightmost  
(least-significant) bit; bit 15 is the leftmost (most-significant) bit.  
bit-control instruction  
An instruction that is used to control the status of an individual bit as opposed to  
the status of an entire word.  
block  
See logic block and instruction block.  
building-block PC  
A PC that is constructed from individual components, or building blocks.With  
building-block PCs, there is no one Unit that is independently identifiable as a  
PC. The PC is rather a functional assembly of Units.  
bus  
A communications path used to pass data between any of the Units connected  
to it.  
bus bar  
The line leading down the left and sometimes right side of a ladder diagram.  
Instruction execution proceeds down the bus bar, which is the starting point for  
all instruction lines.  
byte  
call  
A unit of data equivalent to 8 bits, i.e., half a word.  
A process by which instruction execution shifts from the main program to a sub-  
routine. The subroutine may be called by an instruction or by an interrupt.  
Carry Flag  
A flag that is used with arithmetic operations to hold a carry from an addition or  
multiplication operation, or to indicate that the result is negative in a subtraction  
operation. The carry flag is also used with certain types of shift operations.  
central processing unit  
A device that is capable of storing programs and data, and executing the instruc-  
tions contained in the programs. In a PC System, the central processing unit  
executes the program, processes I/O signals, communicates with external  
devices, etc.  
CH  
See word.  
channel  
See word.  
character code  
checksum  
A numeric (usually binary) code used to represent an alphanumeric character.  
A sum transmitted with a data pack in communications. The checksum can be  
recalculated from the received data to confirm that the data in the transmission  
has not been corrupted.  
clock pulse  
A pulse available at specific bits in memory for use in timing operations. Various  
clock pulses are available with different pulse widths, and therefore different fre-  
quencies.  
clock pulse bit  
common data  
A bit in memory that supplies a pulse that can be used to time operations. Vari-  
ous clock pulse bits are available with different pulse widths, and therefore differ-  
ent frequencies.  
Data that is stored in a memory of a PC and which is shared by other PCs in the  
same the same system. Each PC has a specified section(s) of the area allocated  
to it. Each PC writes to the section(s) allocated to it and reads the sections allo-  
cated to the other PCs with which it shares the common data.  
communications cable  
comparison instruction  
Cable used to transfer data between components of a control system and con-  
forming to the RS-232C or RS-422 standards.  
An instruction used to compare data at different locations in memory to deter-  
mine the relationship between the data.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Completion Flag  
condition  
A flag used with a timer or counter that turns ON when the timer has timed out or  
the counter has reached its set value.  
A symbol placed on an instruction line to indicate an instruction that controls the  
execution condition for the terminal instruction. Each condition is assigned a bit  
in memory that determines its status. The status of the bit assigned to each  
condition determines the next execution condition. Conditions correspond to  
LOAD, LOAD NOT, AND, AND NOT, OR, or OR NOT instructions.  
CONFIG.SYS  
constant  
An MS-DOS file containing environment settings for a personal computer.  
An input for an operand in which the actual numeric value is specified. Constants  
can be input for certain operands in place of memory area addresses. Some  
operands must be input as constants.  
control bit  
A bit in a memory area that is set either through the program or via a Program-  
ming Device to achieve a specific purpose, e.g., a Restart Bit is turned ON and  
OFF to restart a Unit.  
control data  
An operand that specifies how an instruction is to be executed. The control data  
may specify the part of a word is to be used as the operand, it may specify the  
destination for a data transfer instructions, it may specify the size of a data table  
used in an instruction, etc.  
control signal  
A signal sent from the PC to effect the operation of the controlled system.  
Control System  
All of the hardware and software components used to control other devices. A  
Control System includes the PC System, the PC programs, and all I/O devices  
that are used to control or obtain feedback from the controlled system.  
controlled system  
count pulse  
counter  
The devices that are being controlled by a PC System.  
The signal counted by a counter.  
A dedicated group of digits or words in memory used to count the number of  
times a specific process has occurred, or a location in memory accessed  
through a TIM/CNT bit and used to count the number of times the status of a bit  
or an execution condition has changed from OFF to ON.  
CPU Unit  
CTS  
See central processing unit.  
An acronym for clear-to-send, a signal used in communications between elec-  
tronic devices to indicate that the receiver is ready to accept incoming data.  
CY  
See Carry Flag.  
cycle  
One unit of processing performed by the CPU Unit, including ladder program  
execution, peripheral servicing, I/O refreshing, etc.  
cycle time  
The time required to complete one cycle of CPU Unit processing.  
See scheduled interrupt.  
cyclic interrupt  
data area  
An area in the PCs memory that is designed to hold a specific type of data.  
data area boundary  
The highest address available within a data area. When designating an operand  
that requires multiple words, it is necessary to ensure that the highest address in  
the data area is not exceeded.  
data disk  
A floppy disk used to same user programs, DM area contents, comments, and  
other user data.  
data length  
In communications, the number of bits that is to be treated as one unit in data  
transmissions.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
data link  
An automatic data transmission operation that allows PCs or Units within PC to  
pass data back and forth via common data areas.  
data link area  
A common data area established through a data link.  
data movement instruction  
An instruction used to move data from one location in memory to another. The  
data in the original memory location is left unchanged.  
data sharing  
data trace  
data transfer  
debug  
The process in which common data areas or common data words are created  
between two or more PCs.  
A process in which changes in the contents of specific memory locations are  
recorded during program execution.  
Moving data from one memory location to another, either within the same device  
or between different devices connected via a communications line or network.  
A process by which a draft program is corrected until it operates as intended.  
Debugging includes both the removal of syntax errors, as well as the fine-tuning  
of timing and coordination of control operations.  
decimal  
A number system where numbers are expressed to the base 10. In a PC all data  
is ultimately stored in binary form, four binary bits are often used to represent  
one decimal digit, via a system called binary-coded decimal.  
decrement  
default  
Decreasing a numeric value, usually by 1.  
A value automatically set by the PC when the user does not specifically set  
another value. Many devices will assume such default conditions upon the  
application of power.  
definer  
A number used as an operand for an instruction but that serves to define the  
instruction itself, rather that the data on which the instruction is to operate. Defin-  
ers include jump numbers, subroutine numbers, etc.  
destination  
The location where an instruction places the data on which it is operating, as  
opposed to the location from which data is taken for use in the instruction. The  
location from which data is taken is called the source.  
differentiated instruction  
differentiation instruction  
An instruction that is executed only once each time its execution condition goes  
from OFF to ON. Non-differentiated instructions are executed for each scan as  
long as the execution condition stays ON.  
An instruction used to ensure that the operand bit is never turned ON for more  
than one scan after the execution condition goes either from OFF to ON for a  
Differentiate Up instruction or from ON to OFF for a Differentiate Down instruc-  
tion.  
digit  
A unit of storage in memory that consists of four bits.  
digit designator  
An operand that is used to designate the digit or digits of a word to be used by an  
instruction.  
DIN track  
A rail designed to fit into grooves on various devices to allow the devices to be  
quickly and easily mounted to it.  
DIP switch  
Dual in-line package switch, an array of pins in a signal package that is mounted  
to a circuit board and is used to set operating parameters.  
direct output  
distributed control  
A method in which program execution results are output immediately to elimi-  
nate the affects of the cycle time.  
A automation concept in which control of each portion of an automated system is  
located near the devices actually being controlled, i.e., control is decentralized  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
and distributedover the system. Distributed control is a concept basic to PC  
Systems.  
DM area  
A data area used to hold only word data. Words in the DM area cannot be  
accessed bit by bit.  
DM word  
A word in the DM area.  
downloading  
The process of transferring a program or data from a higher-level or host com-  
puter to a lower-level or slave computer. If a Programming Device is involved,  
the Programming Device is considered the host computer.  
EEPROM  
Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory; a type of ROM in which  
stored data can be erased and reprogrammed. This is accomplished using a  
special control lead connected to the EEPROM chip and can be done without  
having to remove the EEPROM chip from the device in which it is mounted.  
electrical noise  
EPROM  
Random variations of one or more electrical characteristics such as voltage, cur-  
rent, and data, which might interfere with the normal operation of a device.  
Erasable programmable read-only memory; a type of ROM in which stored data  
can be erased, by ultraviolet light or other means, and reprogrammed.  
error code  
A numeric code generated to indicate that an error exists, and something about  
the nature of the error. Some error codes are generated by the system; others  
are defined in the program by the operator.  
Error Log Area  
even parity  
An area used to store records indicating the time and nature of errors that have  
occurred in the system.  
A communication setting that adjusts the number of ON bits so that it is always  
even. See parity.  
event processing  
exclusive NOR  
Processing that is performed in response to an event, e.g., an interrupt signal.  
A logic operation whereby the result is true if both of the premises are true or both  
of the premises are false. In ladder-diagram programming, the premises are  
usually the ON/OFF states of bits, or the logical combination of such states,  
called execution conditions.  
exclusive OR  
A logic operation whereby the result is true if one, and only one, of the premises  
is true. In ladder-diagram programming the premises are usually the ON/OFF  
states of bits, or the logical combination of such states, called execution condi-  
tions.  
execution condition  
The ON or OFF status under which an instruction is executed. The execution  
condition is determined by the logical combination of conditions on the same  
instruction line and up to the instruction currently being executed.  
execution cycle  
execution time  
extended counter  
The cycle used to execute all processes required by the CPU Unit, including pro-  
gram execution, I/O refreshing, peripheral servicing, etc.  
The time required for the CPU Unit to execute either an individual instruction or  
an entire program.  
A counter created in a program by using two or more count instructions in suc-  
cession. Such a counter is capable of counting higher than any of the standard  
counters provided by the individual instructions.  
extended timer  
A timer created in a program by using two or more timers in succession. Such a  
timer is capable of timing longer than any of the standard timers provided by the  
individual instructions.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
FA  
Factory automation.  
factory computer  
A general-purpose computer, usually quite similar to a business computer, that  
is used in automated factory control.  
FAL error  
FALS error  
fatal error  
An error generated from the user program by execution of an FAL(06) instruc-  
tion.  
An error generated from the user program by execution of an FALS(07) instruc-  
tion or an error generated by the system.  
An error that stops PC operation and requires correction before operation can  
continue.  
FCS  
flag  
See frame checksum.  
A dedicated bit in memory that is set by the system to indicate some type of oper-  
ating status. Some flags, such as the carry flag, can also be set by the operator  
or via the program.  
flicker bit  
A bit that is programmed to turn ON and OFF at a specific frequency.  
floating-point decimal  
A decimal number expressed as a number (the mantissa) multiplied by a power  
of 10, e.g., 0.538 x 10 .  
5  
force reset  
force set  
The process of forcibly turning OFF a bit via a programming device. Bits are usu-  
ally turned OFF as a result of program execution.  
The process of forcibly turning ON a bit via a programming device. Bits are usu-  
ally turned ON as a result of program execution.  
forced status  
The status of bits that have been force reset or force set.  
frame checksum  
The results of exclusive ORing all data within a specified calculation range. The  
frame checksum can be calculated on both the sending and receiving end of a  
data transfer to confirm that data was transmitted correctly.  
function code  
hardware error  
A two-digit number used to input an instruction into the PC.  
An error originating in the hardware structure (electronic components) of the PC,  
as opposed to a software error, which originates in software (i.e., programs).  
header code  
hexadecimal  
A code in an instruction that specifies what the instruction is to do.  
A number system where all numbers are expressed to the base 16. In a PC all  
data is ultimately stored in binary form, however, displays and inputs on Pro-  
gramming Devices are often expressed in hexadecimal to simplify operation.  
Each group of four binary bits is numerically equivalent to one hexadecimal digit.  
host computer  
A computer that is used to transfer data to or receive data from a PC in a Host  
Link system. The host computer is used for data management and overall sys-  
tem control. Host computers are generally small personal or business comput-  
ers.  
host interface  
host link  
An interface that allows communications with a host computer.  
An interface connecting a PC to a host computer to enable monitoring or pro-  
gram control from the host computer.  
HR area  
I/O bit  
A memory area that preserves bit status during power interrupts and used as  
work bits in programming.  
A bit in memory used to hold I/O status. Input bits reflect the status of input termi-  
nals; output bits hold the status for output terminals.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
I/O capacity  
I/O delay  
The number of inputs and outputs that a PC is able to handle. This number  
ranges from around one hundred for smaller PCs to two thousand for the largest  
ones.  
The delay in time from when a signal is sent to an output to when the status of the  
output is actually in effect or the delay in time from when the status of an input  
changes until the signal indicating the change in the status is received.  
I/O device  
A device connected to the I/O terminals on I/O Units. I/O devices may be either  
part of the Control System, if they function to help control other devices, or they  
may be part of the controlled system.  
I/O interrupt  
I/O point  
An interrupt generated by a signal from I/O.  
The place at which an input signal enters the PC System, or at which an output  
signal leaves the PC System. In physical terms, I/O points correspond to termi-  
nals or connector pins on a Unit; in terms of programming, an I/O points corre-  
spond to I/O bits in the IR area.  
I/O refreshing  
The process of updating output status sent to external devices so that it agrees  
with the status of output bits held in memory and of updating input bits in memory  
so that they agree with the status of inputs from external devices.  
I/O response time  
I/O Unit  
The time required for an output signal to be sent from the PC in response to an  
input signal received from an external device.  
The Units in a PC that are physically connected to I/O devices to input and output  
signals. I/O Units include Input Units and Output Units, each of which is available  
in a range of specifications.  
I/O word  
A word in the IR area that is allocated to a Unit in the PC System and is used to  
hold I/O status for that Unit.  
IBM PC/AT or compatible  
A computer that has similar architecture to, that is logically compatible with, and  
that can run software designed for an IBM PC/AT computer.  
increment  
Increasing a numeric value, usually by 1.  
indirect address  
An address whose contents indicates another address. The contents of the  
second address will be used as the actual operand.  
initialization error  
initialize  
An error that occurs either in hardware or software during the PC System  
startup, i.e., during initialization.  
Part of the startup process whereby some memory areas are cleared, system  
setup is checked, and default values are set.  
input  
The signal coming from an external device into the PC. The term input is often  
used abstractly or collectively to refer to incoming signals.  
input bit  
A bit in the IR area that is allocated to hold the status of an input.  
An external device that sends signals into the PC System.  
input device  
input point  
The point at which an input enters the PC System. Input points correspond  
physically to terminals or connector pins.  
input signal  
install  
A change in the status of a connection entering the PC. Generally an input signal  
is said to exist when, for example, a connection point goes from low to high volt-  
age or from a nonconductive to a conductive state.  
The preparation necessary to use a program or software package, such as the  
LSS or SSS, on a computer.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
instruction  
A direction given in the program that tells the PC of the action to be carried out,  
and the data to be used in carrying out the action. Instructions can be used to  
simply turn a bit ON or OFF, or they can perform much more complex actions,  
such as converting and/or transferring large blocks of data.  
instruction block  
A group of instructions that is logically related in a ladder-diagram program. A  
logic block includes all of the instruction lines that interconnect with each other  
from one or more line connecting to the left bus bar to one or more right-hand  
instructions connecting to the right bus bar.  
instruction execution time  
instruction line  
The time required to execute an instruction. The execution time for any one  
instruction can vary with the execution conditions for the instruction and the  
operands used in it.  
A group of conditions that lie together on the same horizontal line of a ladder dia-  
gram. Instruction lines can branch apart or join together to form instruction  
blocks. Also called a rung.  
interface  
An interface is the conceptual boundary between systems or devices and usu-  
ally involves changes in the way the communicated data is represented. Inter-  
face devices perform operations like changing the coding, format, or speed of  
the data.  
interlock  
A programming method used to treat a number of instructions as a group so that  
the entire group can be reset together when individual execution is not required.  
An interlocked program section is executed normally for an ON execution condi-  
tion and partially reset for an OFF execution condition.  
interrupt (signal)  
A signal that stops normal program execution and causes a subroutine to be run  
or other processing to take place.  
interrupt program  
inverse condition  
JIS  
A program that is executed in response to an interrupt.  
See normally closed condition.  
An acronym for Japanese Industrial Standards.  
jump  
A type of programming where execution moves directly from one point in a pro-  
gram to another, without sequentially executing any instructions in between.  
jump number  
A definer used with a jump that defines the points from and to which a jump is to  
be made.  
ladder diagram (program)  
A form of program arising out of relay-based control systems that uses circuit-  
type diagrams to represent the logic flow of programming instructions. The  
appearance of the program is similar to a ladder, and thus the name.  
ladder diagram symbol  
ladder instruction  
A symbol used in drawing a ladder-diagram program.  
An instruction that represents the conditions on a ladder-diagram program. The  
other instructions in a ladder diagram fall along the right side of the diagram and  
are called terminal instructions.  
Ladder Support Software  
A software package installed on a IBM PC/AT or compatible computer to func-  
tion as a Programming Device.  
least-significant (bit/word)  
LED  
See rightmost (bit/word).  
Acronym for light-emitting diode; a device used as for indicators or displays.  
leftmost (bit/word)  
The highest numbered bits of a group of bits, generally of an entire word, or the  
highest numbered words of a group of words. These bits/words are often called  
most-significant bits/words.  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
link  
A hardware or software connection formed between two Units. Linkcan refer  
either to a part of the physical connection between two Units or a software con-  
nection created to data existing at another location (i.e., data links).  
load  
The processes of copying data either from an external device or from a storage  
area to an active portion of the system such as a display buffer. Also, an output  
device connected to the PC is called a load.  
logic block  
A group of instructions that is logically related in a ladder-diagram program and  
that requires logic block instructions to relate it to other instructions or logic  
blocks.  
logic block instruction  
An instruction used to locally combine the execution condition resulting from a  
logic block with a current execution condition. The current execution condition  
could be the result of a single condition, or of another logic block. AND Load and  
OR Load are the two logic block instructions.  
logic instruction  
Instructions used to logically combine the content of two words and output the  
logical results to a specified result word. The logic instructions combine all the  
same-numbered bits in the two words and output the result to the bit of the same  
number in the specified result word.  
LR area  
A data area that is used in data links.  
LSS  
See Ladder Support Software.  
main program  
mark trace  
All of a program except for subroutine and interrupt programs.  
A process in which changes in the contents of specific memory locations are  
recorded during program execution.  
masked bit  
masking  
A bit whose status has been temporarily made ineffective.  
Coveringan interrupt signal so that the interrupt is not effective until the mask is  
removed.  
megabyte  
A unit of storage equal to one million bytes.  
memory area  
message number  
mnemonic code  
Any of the areas in the PC used to hold data or programs.  
A number assigned to a message generated with the MESSAGE instruction.  
A form of a ladder-diagram program that consists of a sequential list of the  
instructions without using a ladder diagram.  
MONITOR mode  
A mode of PC operation in which normal program execution is possible, and  
which allows modification of data held in memory. Used for monitoring or debug-  
ging the PC.  
most-significant (bit/word)  
NC input  
See leftmost (bit/word).  
An input that is normally closed, i.e., the input signal is considered to be present  
when the circuit connected to the input opens.  
negative delay  
nesting  
A delay set for a data trace in which recording data begins before the trace signal  
by a specified amount.  
Programming one loop within another loop, programming a call to a subroutine  
within another subroutine, or programming one jump within another.  
NO input  
An input that is normally open, i.e., the input signal is considered to be present  
when the circuit connected to the input closes.  
noise interference  
Disturbances in signals caused by electrical noise.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
non-fatal error  
A hardware or software error that produces a warning but does not stop the PC  
from operating.  
normal condition  
See normally open condition.  
normally closed condition  
A condition that produces an ON execution condition when the bit assigned to it  
is OFF, and an OFF execution condition when the bit assigned to it is ON.  
normally open condition  
NOT  
A condition that produces an ON execution condition when the bit assigned to it  
is ON, and an OFF execution condition when the bit assigned to it is OFF.  
A logic operation which inverts the status of the operand. For example, AND  
NOT indicates an AND operation with the opposite of the actual status of the  
operand bit.  
OFF  
The status of an input or output when a signal is said not to be present. The OFF  
state is generally represented by a low voltage or by non-conductivity, but can be  
defined as the opposite of either.  
OFF delay  
The delay between the time when a signal is switched OFF (e.g., by an input  
device or PC) and the time when the signal reaches a state readable as an OFF  
signal (i.e., as no signal) by a receiving party (e.g., output device or PC).  
offset  
ON  
A positive or negative value added to a base value such as an address to specify  
a desired value.  
The status of an input or output when a signal is said to be present. The ON state  
is generally represented by a high voltage or by conductivity, but can be defined  
as the opposite of either.  
ON delay  
The delay between the time when an ON signal is initiated (e.g., by an input  
device or PC) and the time when the signal reaches a state readable as an ON  
signal by a receiving party (e.g., output device or PC).  
one-shot bit  
A bit that is turned ON or OFF for a specified interval of time which is longer than  
one scan.  
One-to-one PC Link  
online edit  
See 1:1 PC Link.  
The process of changed the program directly in the PC from a Programming  
Device. Online editing is possible in PROGRAM or MONITOR mode. In MON-  
ITOR mode, the program can actually be changed while it is being  
operand  
The values designated as the data to be used for an instruction. An operand can  
be input as a constant expressing the actual numeric value to be used or as an  
address to express the location in memory of the data to be used.  
operand bit  
A bit designated as an operand for an instruction.  
operand word  
operating modes  
operating error  
A word designated as an operand for an instruction.  
One of three PC modes: PROGRAM mode, MONITOR mode, and RUN mode.  
An error that occurs during actual PC operation as opposed to an initialization  
error, which occurs before actual operations can begin.  
OR  
A logic operation whereby the result is true if either of two premises is true, or if  
both are true. In ladder-diagram programming the premises are usually ON/OFF  
states of bits or the logical combination of such states called execution condi-  
tions.  
output  
The signal sent from the PC to an external device. The term output is often used  
abstractly or collectively to refer to outgoing signals.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
output bit  
A bit in the IR area that is allocated to hold the status to be sent to an output  
device.  
output device  
output point  
An external device that receives signals from the PC System.  
The point at which an output leaves the PC System. Output points correspond  
physically to terminals or connector pins.  
output signal  
A signal being sent to an external device. Generally an output signal is said to  
exist when, for example, a connection point goes from low to high voltage or from  
a nonconductive to a conductive state.  
overflow  
The state where the capacity of a data storage location has been exceeded.  
overseeing  
Part of the processing performed by the CPU Unit that includes general tasks  
required to operate the PC.  
overwrite  
parity  
Changing the content of a memory location so that the previous content is lost.  
Adjustment of the number of ON bits in a word or other unit of data so that the  
total is always an even number or always an odd number. Parity is generally  
used to check the accuracy of data after being transmitted by confirming that the  
number of ON bits is still even or still odd.  
parity check  
PC  
Checking parity to ensure that transmitted data has not been corrupted.  
See Programmable Controller.  
PC configuration  
The arrangement and interconnections of the Units that are put together to form  
a functional PC.  
PC System  
With building-block PCs, all of the Units connected up to, but not including, the  
I/O devices. The boundaries of a PC System are the PC and the program in its  
CPU Unit at the upper end; and the I/O Units at the lower end.  
PCB  
See printed circuit board.  
PC Setup  
A group of operating parameters set in the PC from a Programming Device to  
control PC operation.  
Peripheral Device  
peripheral servicing  
port  
Devices connected to a PC System to aid in system operation. Peripheral  
devices include printers, programming devices, external storage media, etc.  
Processing signals to and from peripheral devices, including refreshing, com-  
munications processing, interrupts, etc.  
A connector on a PC or computer that serves as a connection to an external  
device.  
positive delay  
Power Supply Unit  
present value  
A delay set for a data trace in which recording data begins after the trace signal  
by a specified amount.  
A Unit that connected to a PC that provides power at the voltage required by the  
other Units.  
The current value registered in a device at any instant during its operation. Pres-  
ent value is abbreviated as PV. The use of this term is generally restricted to tim-  
ers and counters.  
printed circuit board  
PROGRAM mode  
A board onto which electrical circuits are printed for mounting into a computer or  
electrical device.  
A mode of operation that allows inputting and debugging of programs to be car-  
ried out, but that does not permit normal execution of the program.  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Programmable Controller  
A computerized device that can accept inputs from external devices and gener-  
ate outputs to external devices according to a program held in memory. Pro-  
grammable Controllers are used to automate control of external devices.  
Although single-unit Programmable Controllers are available, building-block  
Programmable Controllers are constructed from separate components. Such  
Programmable Controllers are formed only when enough of these separate  
components are assembled to form a functional assembly.  
programmed alarm  
programmed error  
programmed message  
An alarm given as a result of execution of an instruction designed to generate the  
alarm in the program, as opposed to one generated by the system.  
An error arising as a result of the execution of an instruction designed to gener-  
ate the error in the program, as opposed to one generated by the system.  
A message generated as a result of execution of an instruction designed to gen-  
erate the message in the program, as opposed to one generated by the system.  
Programming Console  
Programming Device  
The portable form of Programming Device for a PC.  
A Peripheral Device used to input a program into a PC or to alter or monitor a  
program already held in the PC. There are dedicated programming devices,  
such as Programming Consoles, and there are non-dedicated devices, such as  
a host computer.  
PROM  
Programmable read-only memory; a type of ROM into which the program or  
data may be written after manufacture, by a customer, but which is fixed from  
that time on.  
prompt  
A message or symbol that appears on a display to request input from the opera-  
tor.  
protocol  
The parameters and procedures that are standardized to enable two devices to  
communicate or to enable a programmer or operator to communicate with a  
device.  
PV  
See present value.  
RAM  
Random access memory; a data storage media. RAM will not retain data when  
power is disconnected.  
RAS  
An acronym for reliability, assurance, safety.  
read-only area  
A memory area from which the user can read status but to which data cannot be  
written.  
refresh  
The process of updating output status sent to external devices so that it agrees  
with the status of output bits held in memory and of updating input bits in memory  
so that they agree with the status of inputs from external devices.  
relay-based control  
The forerunner of PCs. In relay-based control, groups of relays are intercon-  
nected to form control circuits. In a PC, these are replaced by programmable cir-  
cuits.  
reserved bit  
A bit that is not available for user application.  
reserved word  
A word in memory that is reserved for a special purpose and cannot be accessed  
by the user.  
reset  
The process of turning a bit or signal OFF or of changing the present value of a  
timer or counter to its set value or to zero.  
response code  
A code sent with the response to a data transmission that specifies how the  
transmitted data was processed.  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
response format  
A format specifying the data required in a response to a data transmission.  
response monitoring time  
The time a device will wait for a response to a data transmission before assum-  
ing that an error has occurred.  
Restart Bit  
result word  
retrieve  
A bit used to restart part of a PC.  
A word used to hold the results from the execution of an instruction.  
The processes of copying data either from an external device or from a storage  
area to an active portion of the system such as a display buffer. Also, an output  
device connected to the PC is called a load.  
retry  
The process whereby a device will re-transmit data which has resulted in an  
error message from the receiving device.  
return  
The process by which instruction execution shifts from a subroutine back to the  
main program (usually the point from which the subroutine was called).  
reversible counter  
reversible shift register  
A counter that can be both incremented and decremented depending on the  
specified conditions.  
A shift register that can shift data in either direction depending on the specified  
conditions.  
right-hand instruction  
rightmost (bit/word)  
See terminal instruction.  
The lowest numbered bits of a group of bits, generally of an entire word, or the  
lowest numbered words of a group of words. These bits/words are often called  
least-significant bits/words.  
rising edge  
ROM  
The point where a signal actually changes from an OFF to an ON status.  
Read only memory; a type of digital storage that cannot be written to. A ROM  
chip is manufactured with its program or data already stored in it and can never  
be changed. However, the program or data can be read as many times as  
desired.  
rotate register  
A shift register in which the data moved out from one end is placed back into the  
shift register at the other end.  
RS-232C interface  
RUN mode  
rung  
An industry standard for serial communications.  
The operating mode used by the PC for normal control operations.  
See instruction line.  
scan  
The process used to execute a ladder-diagram program. The program is  
examined sequentially from start to finish and each instruction is executed in  
turn based on execution conditions.  
scan time  
See cycle time.  
scheduled interrupt  
An interrupt that is automatically generated by the system at a specific time or  
program location specified by the operator. Scheduled interrupts result in the  
execution of specific subroutines that can be used for instructions that must be  
executed repeatedly at a specified interval of time.  
SCP  
See subtract count input.  
seal  
See self-maintaining bit.  
self diagnosis  
A process whereby the system checks its own operation and generates a warn-  
ing or error if an abnormality is discovered.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
self-maintaining bit  
A bit that is programmed to maintain either an OFF or ON status until set or reset  
by specified conditions.  
series  
A wiring method in which Units are wired consecutively in a string.  
servicing  
The process whereby the PC checks a connector or Unit to see if special proces-  
sing is required.  
set  
The process of turning a bit or signal ON.  
set value  
The value from which a decrementing counter starts counting down or to which  
an incrementing counter counts up (i.e., the maximum count), or the time from  
which or for which a timer starts timing. Set value is abbreviated SV.  
shift input signal  
shift register  
An input signal whose OFF to ON transition causes data to be shifted one bit.  
One or more words in which data is shifted a specified number of units to the right  
or left in bit, digit, or word units. In a rotate register, data shifted out one end is  
shifted back into the other end. In other shift registers, new data (either specified  
data, zero(s) or one(s)) is shifted into one end and the data shifted out at the  
other end is lost.  
signed binary  
A binary value that is stored in memory along with a bit that indicates whether the  
value is positive or negative.  
signed decimal  
One-word signed hexadecimal values stored in the twos complement format  
can be displayed at the Programming Console as decimal values from 32,768  
to 32,767.  
software error  
An error that originates in a software program.  
software protect  
A means of protecting data from being changed that uses software as opposed  
to a physical switch or other hardware setting.  
source (word)  
The location from which data is taken for use in an instruction, as opposed to the  
location to which the result of an instruction is to be written. The latter is called  
the destination.  
special instruction  
An instruction input with a function code that handles data processing opera-  
tions within ladder diagrams, as opposed to a basic instruction, which makes up  
the fundamental portion of a ladder diagram.  
SR area  
SSS  
A memory area containing flags and other bits/words with specific functions.  
See SYSMAC Support Software.  
store  
The process of recording a program written into a display buffer permanently in  
memory.  
subroutine  
A group of instructions placed separate from the main program and executed  
only when called from the main program or activated by an interrupt.  
subroutine number  
subtract count input  
A definer used to identify the subroutine that a subroutine call or interrupt acti-  
vates.  
An input signal used to decrement a counter when the signal changes from OFF  
to ON.  
SV  
See set value.  
switching capacity  
synchronous execution  
The maximum voltage/current that a relay can safely switch on and off.  
Execution of programs and servicing operations in which program execution  
and servicing are synchronized so that all servicing operations are executed  
each time the programs are executed.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
syntax  
The form of a program statement (as opposed to its meaning).  
syntax error  
An error in the way in which a program is written. Syntax errors can include  
spellingmistakes (i.e., a function code that does not exist), mistakes in specify-  
ing operands within acceptable parameters (e.g., specifying read-only bits as a  
destination), and mistakes in actual application of instructions (e.g., a call to a  
subroutine that does not exist).  
SYSMAC Support Software  
system configuration  
A software package installed on a IBM PC/AT or compatible computer to func-  
tion as a Programming Device.  
The arrangement in which Units in a System are connected. This term refers to  
the conceptual arrangement and wiring together of all the devices needed to  
comprise the System.  
system error  
An error generated by the system, as opposed to one resulting from execution of  
an instruction designed to generate an error.  
system error message  
system setup  
terminal instruction  
timer  
An error message generated by the system, as opposed to one resulting from  
execution of an instruction designed to generate a message.  
Operating environment settings for a Programming Device, e.g., the LSS or  
SSS.  
An instruction placed on the right side of a ladder diagram that uses the final  
execution conditions of an instruction line.  
A location in memory accessed through a TIM/CNT bit and used to time down  
from the timers set value. Timers are turned ON and reset according to their  
execution conditions.  
TR area  
A data area used to store execution conditions so that they can be reloaded later  
for use with other instructions.  
TR bit  
trace  
A bit in the TR area.  
An operation whereby the program is executed and the resulting data is stored to  
enable step-by-step analysis and debugging.  
trace memory  
transfer  
A memory area used to store the results of trace operations.  
The process of moving data from one location to another within the PC, or  
between the PC and external devices. When data is transferred, generally a  
copy of the data is sent to the destination, i.e., the content of the source of the  
transfer is not changed.  
transmission distance  
trigger  
The distance that a signal can be transmitted.  
A signal used to activate some process, e.g., the execution of a trace operation.  
trigger address  
An address in the program that defines the beginning point for tracing. The  
actual beginning point can be altered from the trigger by defining either a positive  
or negative delay.  
UM area  
Unit  
The memory area used to hold the active program, i.e., the program that is being  
currently executed.  
In OMRON PC terminology, the word Unit is capitalized to indicate any product  
sold for a PC System. Most of the names of these products end with the word  
Unit.  
unit number  
A number assigned to some Units to facilitate identification when assigning  
words or other operating parameters.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
unmasked bit  
A bit whose status is effective. See masked bit.  
unsigned binary  
A binary value that is stored in memory without any indication of whether it is  
positive or negative.  
unsigned decimal  
uploading  
One-word hexadecimal values can be displayed at the Programming Console  
as decimal values from 0 to 65,535.  
The process of transferring a program or data from a lower-level or slave com-  
puter to a higher-level or host computer. If a Programming Devices is involved,  
the Programming Device is considered the host computer.  
watchdog timer  
A timer within the system that ensures that the scan time stays within specified  
limits. When limits are reached, either warnings are given or PC operation is  
stopped depending on the particular limit that is reached.  
WDT  
word  
See watchdog timer.  
A unit of data storage in memory that consists of 16 bits. All data areas consists  
of words. Some data areas can be accessed only by words; others, by either  
words or bits.  
word address  
The location in memory where a word of data is stored. A word address must  
specify (sometimes by default) the data area and the number of the word that is  
being addressed.  
work area  
work bit  
A part of memory containing work words/bits.  
A bit in a work word.  
work word  
A word that can be used for data calculation or other manipulation in program-  
ming, i.e., a work spacein memory. A large portion of the IR area is always  
reserved for work words. Parts of other areas not required for special purposes  
may also be used as work words.  
write protect switch  
write-protect  
A switch used to write-protect the contents of a storage device, e.g., a floppy  
disk. If the hole on the upper left of a floppy disk is open, the information on this  
floppy disk cannot be altered.  
A state in which the contents of a storage device can be read but cannot be  
altered.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
CompoBus/S I/O Unit, standard model, 138  
components  
Analog I/O Unit, 31  
Numbers  
1:1 Host Link, 12  
Communication Adapters, 34  
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit, 33  
CPU Unit, 28  
Expansion I/O Unit, 30  
Temperature Sensor Unit, 31  
connections, 60  
1:1 NT Link, 15  
connections, 64  
1:1 PC Link, 3, 14  
connections, 63  
computer  
1:1 Host Link, 12  
1:N Host Link, 13  
connecting, 60  
1:N Host Link, 13  
connections, 61  
conduit installation, 44  
configuration, 10  
A
Counter Mode, 6  
Adapters, list of communications adapters, 14  
Analog I/O Unit, standard model, 137  
analog setting function, 2, 5  
counters  
changing SV, Programming Console, 95  
example of inputting, 105  
CPU Units, standard models, 137  
cycle, CPM1A operating cycle, 112  
analog volume controls, 5  
location, 29  
cycle time  
ASCII, converting displays, Programming Console, 100  
atmosphere, 20  
displaying, Programming Console, 101  
processing, 112  
B
D
data, modifying, Programming Console, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99  
binary data, modifying, Programming Console, 97  
bit status, force-set/reset, Programming Console, 99  
bits, searching, Programming Console, 87  
data link, 14, 63  
decimal data with sign. See signed decimal data  
decimal data without sign. See unsigned decimal data  
dielectric strength, 20  
buzzer operation, Programming Console, 82  
differentiated instructions, entering, 85  
dimensions, 141  
C
DIN Track installation, 40  
cabinet  
displays  
installation, precautions, 38  
Programming Console installation, 77  
converting between hex and ASCII, Programming Con-  
sole, 100  
cycle time, Programming Console, 101  
characteristics, 21  
check levels, program checks, 115  
checking, program syntax, Programming Console, 89  
downloading, programs, 133  
duct installation, 43  
circuit configuration  
inputs, 23  
E
outputs, relay, 25, 26  
clearing, memory areas, Programming Console, 81  
communication errors, 113  
EC Directives, precautions, xvii  
EEPROM  
mounting/removing, 130  
specifications, 129  
communications, adapters, list, 14  
communications adapters, standard models, 138  
communications baud rate, for SSS, 68  
electrical noise, preventing, 38, 43  
ERR/ALM indicator  
flashing, 113  
lit, 113  
CompoBus/S I/O Link, 15  
connections, 65  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
errors  
communications, 113  
I/O terminals, IR bit allocation, 4  
incremental mode, 8  
error processing, 109  
fatal, 113  
indicators  
CompoBus/S LED indicators, 33  
flashing ERR/ALM indicator, 113  
lit ERR/ALM indicator, 113  
PC status indicators, 29  
identifying, 114  
non-fatal, 113  
programming, 115  
Programming Console operations, 115  
reading/clearing messages, Programming Console, 82  
user-defined errors, 114  
inductive loads, 51, 59  
initialization processes, 112  
input devices, connecting, 50  
input filter, 2  
Expansion I/O Units, 2  
available models, 11, 137  
components, 30  
connection, 41  
standard models, 137  
input filter function, 5  
input interrupts, 2, 6  
Expansion Memory Unit, 127  
connections, 131  
input specifications, 23, 24  
input time constant, 5  
Expansion Units, available models, 12, 137  
inputs, wiring, 47  
configuration, 47  
FG  
FAL numbers, 113  
inspections, 125  
installation, 39  
site, selecting, 37  
FAL(06), 114  
instructions  
FALS numbers, 113  
FALS(07), 115  
inserting and deleting, Programming Console, 88  
searching, Programming Console, 87  
insulation resistance, 20  
interlock circuit, example, 36  
interlocks, 36  
false inputs, 51  
fatal errors, troubleshooting, 119  
features, 2  
interrupt inputs, 2, 6  
Interrupt Mode, 6  
filter function, 2  
flash memory, precautions, 111  
flicker output, example, 106  
interval timer, 2, 7  
IR bit allocation, 4  
force-set/reset  
clearing, Programming Console, 100  
Programming Console, 99  
L
functions, 5  
grounding, 20, 29, 44  
leakage current, 51  
limit circuit, 36  
limit switches, preventing false inputs, 51  
H
hexadecimal data, converting displays, Programming Console,  
100  
M
high-speed counter, 2, 8  
maintenance, 125  
Host Link, 3  
memory  
communications, 12  
connections, 60  
backup, 2, 21  
Expansion Memory Unit, 127  
protection, 21  
memory areas  
I
clearing, Programming Console, 81  
partial clear, 81  
I/O capacity, 21  
uploading/downloading, 128  
I/O errors, troubleshooting, 121  
I/O line noise, preventing, 43  
messages, reading/clearing, 82  
mode, changing the PC mode, 76  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Mode Setting Switch, RS-232C Adapter, 34  
model numbers, 137  
P
panel, Programming Console installation, 77  
panel installation, precautions, 38  
password, entering on Programming Console, 78  
PC Link, 3  
modifying  
binary data, Programming Console, 97  
data, Programming Console, 95  
hexadecimal/BCD data, Programming Console, 96  
signed decimal data, Programming Console, 98  
SV, Programming Console, 95  
PC mode, changing, 76  
unsigned decimal data, Programming Console, 99  
PC Status, indicators, 29  
MONITOR mode  
description, 76  
Peripheral Devices, 3, 139  
available models, 139  
connecting, 15, 60  
using, 67  
example test run, 107  
monitoring  
3-word monitor, Programming Console, 9394  
binary monitor, Programming Console, 9293  
differentiation monitor, Programming Console, 92  
signed decimal monitor, Programming Console, 94  
status, Programming Console, 90  
photoelectric switches, preventing false inputs, 51  
PNP current output, connecting, 50  
power, consumption, 20  
unsigned decimal monitor, Programming Console, 9495  
power cables, 43  
MSG(46), 115  
power interruptions, 36  
power supply  
capacity, 20  
interrupt time, 20  
precautions, 36  
troubleshooting, 118, 124  
wiring, 45  
N
noise, preventing electrical noise, 38, 43  
noise immunity, 20  
precautions  
design precautions, 36  
general, xi  
handling, 126  
SSS, 68  
uploading/downloading, 128  
non-fatal errors, troubleshooting, 120  
NPN current output, connecting, 50  
NPN open collector, connecting, 50  
NT Link, 3  
program, programming example, 101  
program capacity, 21  
program memory, setting address and reading content, Pro-  
gramming Console, 83  
O
PROGRAM mode, description, 76  
one-shot mode, 7  
Programmable Terminal, 3  
1:1 Host Link, 13  
operating conditions, troubleshooting, 123  
operation, preparations, 78  
1:1 Host Link connection, 61  
operations, internal processing, flowchart, 112  
output short protection, 58  
programming  
checking the program, 107  
checks for syntax, Programming Console, 8990  
errors, 115  
inserting and deleting instructions, Programming Console,  
8889  
preparation for, 101  
searching, Programming Console, 8788  
setting and reading a memory address, Programming Con-  
sole, 83  
output specifications  
relay output, 25  
transistor output  
sink type, 26  
source type, 26  
output wiring  
configuration, 53, 55, 57  
relay output, 52  
transistor output  
sink type, 55  
Programming Console  
connecting, 15, 60, 77  
keys, 74  
models, 74  
operations, 80  
source type, 57  
overseeing processes, 112  
programming example, 101  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
programs  
checking, check levels, 115  
SSS, 68  
See also SYSMAC Support Software  
offline and online operations, 73  
offline operations, 69  
online operations, 72  
precautions, 68  
restrictions, 68  
System Setup, 68  
downloading, 133  
entering and editing, Programming Console, 84  
uploading, 132  
proximity switches, preventing false inputs, 51  
pulse output function, 2, 7  
status, monitoring, Programming Console, 90  
SV, modifying, Programming Console, 95  
syntax, checking the program, Programming Console, 89  
QR  
SYSMAC Support Software, 16  
See also SSS  
quick-response inputs, 2, 7  
relay outputs, connecting, 50  
response time, for interrupt inputs, 6  
restrictions, SSS, 68  
connecting, 15  
SYSMAC-CPT, 16  
SYSMAC-CPT, 68  
system  
checks, 110  
configuration, 10  
RS-232C Adapter  
components, 34  
specifications, 27  
System Setup, 68  
RS-422 Adapter  
components, 34  
specifications, 27  
T
temperature  
RUN mode, description, 76  
effect on capacitor backup, 22  
operating, storage, 20  
Temperature Sensor Units  
precautions, xv  
S
standard models, 138  
scheduled interrupt mode, 7  
temperature, ambient, 20  
scheduled interrupts, 2, 7  
terminals, screw size, 20  
search  
Termination Resistance Switch, RS-422 Adapter, 34  
instruction, Programming Console, 87  
operands, Programming Console, 8788  
test run  
example, 107  
procedure, 110  
self-diagnosis functions, 21, 113  
self-holding bit, example, 104  
shock resistance, 20  
timers  
changing SV, Programming Console, 95  
example of inputting, 105  
signed decimal data  
troubleshooting, 117  
fatal errors, 119  
modifying, Programming Console, 98  
monitoring, 94  
I/O errors, 121  
non-fatal errors, 120  
operating conditions, 123  
power supply, 118, 124  
single-phase output, 7  
specifications  
changes, 17  
characteristics, 21  
Communications Adapters, 27  
Expansion Memory Unit, 129  
general specifications, 20  
input specifications, 23, 24  
output specifications  
relay output, 25  
U
unsigned decimal data  
modifying, Programming Console, 99  
monitoring, 9495  
up/down mode, 8  
transistor output, sink type, 26  
transistor output, source type, 26  
uploading, programs, 132  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
V
W
weight  
vibration resistance, 20  
CPU Unit, 20  
Expansion I/O Unit, 20  
Expansion Unit, 20  
voltage  
operating voltage range, 20  
supply voltage, 20  
wiring, 43  
power supply, 45  
voltage output, connecting, 50  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Revision History  
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.  
Cat. No. W317-E1-5  
Revision code  
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the  
previous version.  
Revision code  
Date  
Revised content  
Original production  
1
2
April 1997  
July 1997  
Corrections and addition of supplementary explanation. Pages 8, 19, 40, 103, 104: Information on sink-type and  
CPU Unit model numbers changed throughout the manual. source-type transistor output models added.  
Pages 12, 48, 102: SYSMAC-CPT information added.  
Page xiii: Minor change to AC Power Supply Unit pre-  
caution.  
Page 15: Changed the specifications for the analog con-  
trols. Pulse output added.  
Page xv: Changes made to crimp terminal wiring and  
forced set/reset precautions.  
Page 18, 19, 32, 34, 35, 39, 53 : Changed the wording of  
the caution.  
Page 35: Information for 24-VDC Power Supply rewrit-  
ten.  
Page 2: Information on sink-type and source-type tran-  
sistor output models added. Pulse output function  
information added.  
Page 3: Information added to the note. Table in 1-1-2 I/O Page 41: Output Wiring Precautions rewritten and added  
Terminal and IR Bit Allocation changed to reflect the  
to.  
addition of transistor output models.  
Page 101: CPU Unit and Expansion I/O Unit models  
Page 6: Pulse Output Function section added.  
added.  
Page xiii, xiv: Cautions rewritten and corrected.  
Page 3: Expansion I/O Unit model number corrected.  
Page 4: Information added to Input Filter Function.  
Page 13: SYSMAC-CPT added in text.  
Page 52: Note and section on online editing added.  
Page 57: Note on the Programming Consoles added.  
Page 58: 4-2-3 Preparation for Operation and 4-2-4  
Entering the Password sections added.  
3
November 1997  
Pages 61, 62, 67, 74, 80, 84: Screen messages cor-  
rected.  
Page 17: Memory protection and memory backup specs  
changed.  
Page 81: T001 in the ladder program corrected.  
Page 88: Notes changed below table.  
Page 18: Entire page redone.  
Page 21: Voltage ranges for max. switching capacities  
changed.  
Page 91: AR 1309 corrected and AR 1314 added.  
Page 22: Communications Adapter Specifications added. Page 97: Reference to Memory Error Check flowchart  
added.  
Page 23: Input indicator description corrected.  
Page 101: Memory Error Check flowchart added.  
Page 102: Changed humidity  
Page 24: Note added to 2-2-2 Expansion I/O Unit Com-  
ponents.  
Page 38: Voltage allowances added.  
Page 4: Information added to Input Filter Function.  
Page 11: RS-232C Adapter description at the top of the  
page changed.  
Page 13: 1-3 Revised Specifications added.  
Page 37: Crimp connector caution corrected.  
Pages 62, 81: Screen messages corrected.  
3A  
January 1999  
Major revisions throughout the manual. Information on the Analog I/O Unit, CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit, and 8-point  
Expansion I/O Units added.  
4
5
August 1999  
Information on the Expansion Memory Unit and Temperature Sensor Units added throughout the manual.  
Layout and wording changed to distinguish between Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units. In addi-  
tion, the following changes were made.  
February 2000  
Page ix: Information on relevant manuals added.  
Page xv: Second item removed. Memory Unitsremoved from third item. Safety precautions for  
Temperature Sensor Units added.  
Page 9: Information on Expansion Unit functions added.  
Page 15: Minor change to first graphic.  
Page 18: Information on inrush current and noise immunity changed.  
Page 38: Information added to table.  
Page 61: Minor changes to first paragraph.  
Page 66: Information added to introduction.  
Pages 73, 80, 81, 83, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 93, 95, 97, 98, 104: Minor changes to screen messages.  
Page 98: Note added to middle graphic.  
Page 124: Information added to Peripheral Devicestable.  
Pages 125-126: Illustrations replaced.  
Page 126, 128: Minor changes to headings.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Miele Vacuum Cleaner S 4212 S 4782 User Manual
Multiquip Music Mixer MC3H User Manual
NetComm Network Card NP730 User Manual
Nikon Digital Camera S6400 User Manual
Nokia Cell Phone 1006 User Manual
Nortel Networks Network Router 312865 A User Manual
Nortel Networks Switch BMD00007 User Manual
NuTone Ventilation Hood ZN110HL User Manual
Olympus Microcassette Recorder LS 11 User Manual
Oster Toaster TSSTTRWF2S User Manual